linux-nat: Exploit /proc/<pid>/mem for writing
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 872@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
873Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874flags governing input file handling.
875
a712da20
NC
876@kindex -q
877@kindex --emit-relocs
878@cindex retain relocations in final executable
879@item -q
880@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 881Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
882Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884in larger executables.
885
dbab7a7b
NC
886This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
4f471f39
RS
888@kindex --force-dynamic
889@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890@item --force-dynamic
891Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892to VxWorks targets.
893
252b5132
RH
894@cindex partial link
895@cindex relocatable output
896@kindex -r
1049f94e 897@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 898@item -r
1049f94e 899@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 900Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 901turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
902linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 905@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
906If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
62bf86b4
HPN
910When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914with input files in other formats at all.
915
252b5132
RH
916This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918@kindex -R @var{file}
919@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920@cindex symbol-only input
921@item -R @var{filename}
922@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
ff5dcc92 928For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 929followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 930the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
931
932@kindex -s
933@kindex --strip-all
934@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 935@item -s
252b5132
RH
936@itemx --strip-all
937Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939@kindex -S
940@kindex --strip-debug
941@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 942@item -S
252b5132
RH
943@itemx --strip-debug
944Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
946@kindex -t
947@kindex --trace
948@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 949@item -t
252b5132 950@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 951Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
952
953@kindex -T @var{script}
954@kindex --script=@var{script}
955@cindex script files
956@item -T @var{scriptfile}
957@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
958Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 959@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 960@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
961output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
962the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
963specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
964options accumulate.
252b5132 965
14be8564
L
966@kindex -dT @var{script}
967@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
968@cindex script files
969@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
970@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
971Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
972
973This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
974processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
975command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
976@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
977behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
978command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
979the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
980@samp{gcc}).
981
252b5132
RH
982@kindex -u @var{symbol}
983@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
984@cindex undefined symbol
985@item -u @var{symbol}
986@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
987Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
988symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
989modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
990different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
991option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
992
0a618243
AB
993If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
994into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
995undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
996instead.
997
998@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
999@cindex symbols, require defined
1000@cindex defined symbol
1001@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1002Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1003is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1004is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1005and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1006@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1007can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1008
252b5132
RH
1009@kindex -Ur
1010@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1011@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1012For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1013@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1014turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1015@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1016It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1017with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1018be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1019@samp{-r} for the others.
1020
c005eb9e
AB
1021@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1022@cindex orphan sections
1023@cindex sections, orphan
1024@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1025Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1026specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1027
1028@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1029
1030@table @code
1031@item place
1032Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1033the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1034@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1035
1036@item discard
1037All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1038@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1039
1040@item warn
1041The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1042issue a warning.
1043
1044@item error
1045The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1046@end table
1047
1048The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1049
577a0623
AM
1050@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1051@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1052Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1053@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1054missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1055specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1056multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1057input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1058in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1059
252b5132
RH
1060@kindex -v
1061@kindex -V
1062@kindex --version
1063@cindex version
1064@item -v
1065@itemx --version
1066@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1067Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1068lists the supported emulations.
1069
1070@kindex -x
1071@kindex --discard-all
1072@cindex deleting local symbols
1073@item -x
1074@itemx --discard-all
1075Delete all local symbols.
1076
1077@kindex -X
1078@kindex --discard-locals
1079@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1080@item -X
252b5132 1081@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1082Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1083system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1084or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1085
1086@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1087@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1088@cindex symbol tracing
1089@item -y @var{symbol}
1090@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1091Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1092option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1093to prepend an underscore.
1094
1095This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1096don't know where the reference is coming from.
1097
1098@kindex -Y @var{path}
1099@item -Y @var{path}
1100Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1101for Solaris compatibility.
1102
1103@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1104@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1105The recognized keywords are:
1106@table @samp
1107
1108@item combreloc
1109Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1110lookup caching possible.
1111
b8871f35
L
1112@item common
1113Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1114link.
1115
cd6d6c15 1116@item defs
560e09e9 1117Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1118shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1119
6aa29e7b
JJ
1120@item execstack
1121Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1122
b039ef04
L
1123@item global
1124This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1125the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1126of subsequently loaded libraries.
1127
cd6d6c15
NC
1128@item initfirst
1129This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1130It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1131before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1132the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1133the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1134objects.
1135
1136@item interpose
1137Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1138but the primary executable.
1139
5fa222e4
AM
1140@item lazy
1141When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1142dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1143the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1144Lazy binding is the default.
1145
cd6d6c15
NC
1146@item loadfltr
1147Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1148runtime.
1149
1150@item muldefs
1151Allows multiple definitions.
1152
1153@item nocombreloc
1154Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1155
b8871f35
L
1156@item nocommon
1157Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1158link.
1159
cd6d6c15 1160@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1161Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1162defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1163
1164@item nodefaultlib
1165Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1166ignore any default library search paths.
1167
1168@item nodelete
1169Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1170
1171@item nodlopen
1172Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1173
1174@item nodump
1175Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1176
6aa29e7b
JJ
1177@item noexecstack
1178Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1179
8dfef1bd
L
1180@item text
1181Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1182
1183@item notext
1184Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1185
1186@item textoff
1187Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1188
6aa29e7b
JJ
1189@item norelro
1190Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1191
cd6d6c15
NC
1192@item now
1193When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1194dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1195when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1196deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1197first called.
1198
1199@item origin
1200Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1201
6aa29e7b
JJ
1202@item relro
1203Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1204
24718e3b
L
1205@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1206Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1207
1208@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1209Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1210
04c3a755
NS
1211@item stack-size=@var{value}
1212Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1213Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1214@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1215
d258b828
IZ
1216@item bndplt
1217Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1218
889c2a67
L
1219@item noextern-protected-data
1220Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1221library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1222to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1223generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1224module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1225i386 and x86-64.
1226
aec6b87e
L
1227@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1228Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1229This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1230dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1231Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1232
4c10bbaa
L
1233@item noreloc-overflow
1234Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1235relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1236overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1237
caa65211
L
1238@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1239@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1240@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1241@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1242@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1243Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1244to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1245@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1246@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1247@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1248@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1249@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1250Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1251
cd6d6c15
NC
1252@end table
1253
ece2d90e 1254Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1255
1256@kindex -(
1257@cindex groups of archives
1258@item -( @var{archives} -)
1259@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1260The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1261either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1262
1263The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1264references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1265the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1266archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1267object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1268would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1269they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1270resolved.
1271
1272Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1273it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1274more archives.
1275
69da35b5
NC
1276@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1277@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1278@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1279@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1280Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1281recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1282and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1283the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1284behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1285so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1286restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1287
4a43e768
AM
1288@kindex --as-needed
1289@kindex --no-as-needed
1290@item --as-needed
1291@itemx --no-as-needed
1292This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1293on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1294the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1295on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1296needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1297emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1298non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1299the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1300non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1301Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1302the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1303needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1304from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1305
e56f61be
L
1306@kindex --add-needed
1307@kindex --no-add-needed
1308@item --add-needed
1309@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1310These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1311their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1312options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1313and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1314
252b5132
RH
1315@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1316@item -assert @var{keyword}
1317This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1318
1319@kindex -Bdynamic
1320@kindex -dy
1321@kindex -call_shared
1322@item -Bdynamic
1323@itemx -dy
1324@itemx -call_shared
1325Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1326for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1327default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1328for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1329multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1330@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1331
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332@kindex -Bgroup
1333@item -Bgroup
1334Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1335section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1336object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1337@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1338only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1339
252b5132
RH
1340@kindex -Bstatic
1341@kindex -dn
1342@kindex -non_shared
1343@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1344@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1345@itemx -dn
1346@itemx -non_shared
1347@itemx -static
1348Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1349platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1350variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1351may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1352library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1353option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1354option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1355shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1356references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1357libraries.
252b5132
RH
1358
1359@kindex -Bsymbolic
1360@item -Bsymbolic
1361When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1362definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1363for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1364within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1365@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1366executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1367the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1368support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1369
40b36307
L
1370@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1371@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1372When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1373symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1374This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1375when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1376to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1378libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1379
55255dae
L
1380@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1381@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1382Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1383typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1384global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1385within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1386to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1387in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1388which support shared libraries.
1389
1390The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1391scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1392
40b36307
L
1393@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1394@item --dynamic-list-data
1395Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1396
1397@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1398@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1399Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1400is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1401
0b8a70d9
L
1402@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1403@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1404Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1405
252b5132
RH
1406@kindex --check-sections
1407@kindex --no-check-sections
1408@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1409@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1410Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1411been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1412perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1413suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1414allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1415restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1416Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1417force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1418option.
252b5132 1419
ddbb8a31
NC
1420@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1421@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1422@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1423@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1424This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1425by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1426command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1427output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1428input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1429specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1430follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1431behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1432
1433This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1434libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1435mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1436their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1437required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1438the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1439dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1440symbols.
1441
252b5132
RH
1442@cindex cross reference table
1443@kindex --cref
1444@item --cref
1445Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1446generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1447Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1448
1449The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1450easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1451sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1452symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1453definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1454where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1455symbol are listed.
252b5132 1456
4818e05f
AM
1457@cindex common allocation
1458@kindex --no-define-common
1459@item --no-define-common
1460This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1461The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1462@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1463
1464The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1465the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1466of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1467forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1468Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1469from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1470This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1471and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1472duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1473paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1474
252b5132 1475@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1476@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1477@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1478Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1479address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1480times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1481limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1482context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1483symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1484constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1485using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1486@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1487equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1488
1489@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1490@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1491@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1492@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1493@itemx --no-demangle
1494These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1495and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1496present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1497underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1498mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1499different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1500to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1501demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1502is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1503
1504@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1505@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1506@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1507@item -I@var{file}
1508@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1509Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1510generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1511linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1512doing.
1513
9b8b325a
RF
1514@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1515@item --no-dynamic-linker
1516When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1517linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1518executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1519entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1520
7ce691ae 1521@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1522@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1523@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1524@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1525Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1526with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1527
252b5132
RH
1528@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1529@item --force-exe-suffix
1530Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1531
1532If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1533@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1534the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1535option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1536Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1537it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1538
1539@kindex --gc-sections
1540@kindex --no-gc-sections
1541@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1542@item --gc-sections
1543@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1544Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1545targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1546performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1547@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1548collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1549implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1550
d5465ba2
AM
1551@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1552examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1553symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1554command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1555referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1556libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1557referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1558the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1559relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1560
ac69cbc6 1561This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1562@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1563specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1564a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1565
c17d87de
NC
1566@kindex --print-gc-sections
1567@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1568@cindex garbage collection
1569@item --print-gc-sections
1570@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1571List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1572printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1573collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1574default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1575be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1576line.
1577
22185505 1578@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1579@cindex garbage collection
1580@item --gc-keep-exported
1581When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1582collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1583default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1584executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1585collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1586Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1587it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1588ELF format targets.
1589
30824704
RM
1590@kindex --print-output-format
1591@cindex output format
1592@item --print-output-format
1593Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1594other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1595in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1596
3604cb1f
TG
1597@kindex --print-memory-usage
1598@cindex memory usage
1599@item --print-memory-usage
1600Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1601the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1602quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1603headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1604parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1605
1606@smallexample
1607Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1608 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1609 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1610@end smallexample
1611
252b5132
RH
1612@cindex help
1613@cindex usage
1614@kindex --help
1615@item --help
1616Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1617
ea20a7da
CC
1618@kindex --target-help
1619@item --target-help
1620Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1621
2509a395
SL
1622@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1623@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1624Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1625@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1626
1627@cindex memory usage
1628@kindex --no-keep-memory
1629@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1630@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1631symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1632instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1633necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1634while linking a large executable.
1635
1636@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1637@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1638@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1639@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1640Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1641is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1642The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1643behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1644libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1645
aa713662
L
1646@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1647@kindex -z muldefs
1648@item --allow-multiple-definition
1649@itemx -z muldefs
1650Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1651report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1652first definition will be used.
1653
b79e8c78 1654@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1655@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1656@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1657@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1658Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1659This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1660determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1661shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1662how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1663
903249d7
NC
1664The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1665referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1666an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1667a shared library.
1668
1669The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1670libraries specified at link time are that:
1671
1672@itemize @bullet
1673@item
1674A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1675that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1676resolvable at load time.
1677@item
1678There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1679symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1680
1681The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1682select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1683architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1684appropriate memset function.
1685@end itemize
b79e8c78 1686
31941635
L
1687@kindex --no-undefined-version
1688@item --no-undefined-version
1689Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1690it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1691will be issued instead.
1692
3e3b46e5
PB
1693@kindex --default-symver
1694@item --default-symver
1695Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1696exported symbols.
1697
1698@kindex --default-imported-symver
1699@item --default-imported-symver
1700Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1701imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1702
252b5132
RH
1703@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1704@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1705Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1706files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1707been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1708This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1709errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1710have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1711inappropriate.
1712
fe7929ce
AM
1713@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1714@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1715Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1716library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1717
252b5132
RH
1718@kindex --no-whole-archive
1719@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1720Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1721archive files.
1722
1723@cindex output file after errors
1724@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1725@item --noinhibit-exec
1726Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1727Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1728errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1729when it issues any error whatsoever.
1730
0a9c1c8e
CD
1731@kindex -nostdlib
1732@item -nostdlib
1733Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1734command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1735(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1736
252b5132 1737@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1738@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1739@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1740@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1741file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1742@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1743object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1744object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1745should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1746usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1747name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1748list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1749command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1750this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1751@end ifclear
1752
76359541
TP
1753@kindex --out-implib
1754@item --out-implib @var{file}
1755Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1756the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1757library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1758may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1759behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1760step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1761the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1762
36af4a4e
JJ
1763@kindex -pie
1764@kindex --pic-executable
1765@item -pie
1766@itemx --pic-executable
1767@cindex position independent executables
1768Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1769ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1770libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1771address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1772normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1773defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1774
252b5132
RH
1775@kindex -qmagic
1776@item -qmagic
1777This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1778
1779@kindex -Qy
1780@item -Qy
1781This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1782
1783@kindex --relax
1784@cindex synthesizing linker
1785@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1786@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1787@item --relax
28d5f677 1788@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1789An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1790@ifset GENERIC
1791This option is only supported on a few targets.
1792@end ifset
1793@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1794@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1795@end ifset
1796@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1797@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1798@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1799@ifset XTENSA
1800@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1801@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1802@ifset M68HC11
1803@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1804@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1805@ifset NIOSII
1806@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1807@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1808@ifset POWERPC
1809@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1810@end ifset
252b5132 1811
28d5f677
NC
1812On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1813global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1814addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1815synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1816instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1817
1818On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1819debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1820@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1821This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1822family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1823@end ifset
1824
1825@ifset GENERIC
1826On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1827but ignored.
1828@end ifset
1829
28d5f677
NC
1830On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1831@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1832
252b5132
RH
1833@cindex retaining specified symbols
1834@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1835@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1836@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1837@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1838Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1839discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1840symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1841@ifset GENERIC
1842(such as VxWorks)
1843@end ifset
1844where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1845run-time memory.
1846
1847@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1848or symbols needed for relocations.
1849
1850You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1851line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1852
1853@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1854@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1855@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1856@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1857Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1858linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1859arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1860them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1861also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1862objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1863@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1864ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1865@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1866
ff5dcc92 1867The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1868SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1869@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1870runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1871options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1872gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1873file systems.
252b5132 1874
ff5dcc92 1875For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1876followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1877the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1878@end ifset
1879
1880@ifset GENERIC
1881@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1882@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1883@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1884When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1885happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1886of the input files.
1887
1888When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1889non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1890shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1891explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1892specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1893@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1894either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1895appearing multiple times.
1896
e680a6b6
NC
1897The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1898directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1899containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1900and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
190164-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1902
1903The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1904@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1905supported.
1906
28c309a2
NC
1907This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1908that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1909is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1910runtime linker would do.
1911
252b5132 1912The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1913libraries:
252b5132
RH
1914@enumerate
1915@item
ff5dcc92 1916Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1917@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1918Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1919between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1920specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1921used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1922at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1923by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1924the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1925@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1926On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1927@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1928environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1929@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1930On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1931directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1932@item
a1b8d843 1933For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1934variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1935@item
ec4eb78a
L
1936For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1937@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1938libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1939@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1940@item
252b5132
RH
1941The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1942@item
1943For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1944exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1945@end enumerate
1946
1947If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1948warning and continue with the link.
1949@end ifset
1950
1951@kindex -shared
1952@kindex -Bshareable
1953@item -shared
1954@itemx -Bshareable
1955@cindex shared libraries
1956Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1957and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1958shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1959undefined symbols in the link.
1960
252b5132 1961@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1962@item --sort-common
1963@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1964@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1965This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1966ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1967sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1968eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1969between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1970specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1971
2509a395
SL
1972@kindex --sort-section=name
1973@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1974This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1975patterns in the linker script.
1976
2509a395
SL
1977@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1978@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1979This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1980patterns in the linker script.
1981
252b5132 1982@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1983@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1984Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1985each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1986size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1987
1988@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1989@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1990Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1991output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1992This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1993certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1994cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1995that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1996support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1997input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1998more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1999many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2000
2001@kindex --stats
2002@item --stats
2003Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2004as execution time and memory usage.
2005
2509a395 2006@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2007@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2008Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2009configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2010that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2011
252b5132
RH
2012@kindex --traditional-format
2013@cindex traditional format
2014@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2015For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2016the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2017use the traditional format instead.
2018
2019@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2020For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2021symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2022full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2023@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2024trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2025combine duplicate entries.
2026
2509a395
SL
2027@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2028@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2029Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2030address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2031times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2032line.
2033@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2034for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2035@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2036should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2037sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2038
2509a395
SL
2039@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2040@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2041@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2042@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2043@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2044@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2045@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2046Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2047@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2048
2509a395
SL
2049@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2050@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2051@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2052When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2053byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2054
9d5777a3
RM
2055@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2056@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2057@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2058When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2059the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2060text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2061
0d705e9f
AM
2062@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2063@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2064@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2065When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2066model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2067
560e09e9
NC
2068@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2069@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2070Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2071values for @samp{method}:
2072
2073@table @samp
2074@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2075Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2076
2077@item report-all
da8bce14 2078Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2079
2080@item ignore-in-object-files
2081Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2082ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2083
2084@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2085Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2086ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2087when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2088libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2089command line.
2090@end table
2091
2092The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2093by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2094
2095Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2096unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2097can change this to a warning.
2098
1715a13c
L
2099@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2100@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2101@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2102@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2103Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2104supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2105the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2106argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2107
2108@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2109@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2110@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2111Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2112used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2113about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2114is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2115see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2116use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2117symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2118@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2119
7ce691ae 2120@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2121@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2122@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2123@item --warn-common
2124Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2125a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2126but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2127you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2128Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2129warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2130
2131There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2132
2133@table @samp
2134@item int i = 1;
2135A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2136file.
2137
2138@item extern int i;
2139An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2140There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2141variable somewhere.
2142
2143@item int i;
2144A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2145variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2146The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2147single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2148size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2149a definition of the same variable.
2150@end table
2151
2152The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2153Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2154just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2155encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2156a common symbol.
2157
2158@enumerate
2159@item
2160Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2161definition for the symbol.
2162@smallexample
2163@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2164 overridden by definition
2165@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2166@end smallexample
2167
2168@item
2169Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2170the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2171except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2172@smallexample
2173@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2174 overriding common
2175@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2176@end smallexample
2177
2178@item
2179Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2180@smallexample
2181@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2182 of `@var{symbol}'
2183@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2184@end smallexample
2185
2186@item
2187Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2188@smallexample
2189@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2190 overridden by larger common
2191@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2192@end smallexample
2193
2194@item
2195Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2196the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2197encountered in a different order.
2198@smallexample
2199@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2200 overriding smaller common
2201@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2202@end smallexample
2203@end enumerate
2204
2205@kindex --warn-constructors
2206@item --warn-constructors
2207Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2208object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2209detect the use of global constructors.
2210
2211@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2212@item --warn-multiple-gp
2213Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2214This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2215Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2216section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2217of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2218base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2219base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2220bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2221large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2222values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2223option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2224
2225@kindex --warn-once
2226@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2227@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2228@item --warn-once
2229Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2230which refers to it.
2231
2232@kindex --warn-section-align
2233@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2234@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2235@item --warn-section-align
2236Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2237alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2238The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2239is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2240the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2241
8fdd7217
NC
2242@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2243@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2244Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2245
a0c402a5
L
2246@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2247@item --warn-alternate-em
2248Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2249
560e09e9
NC
2250@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2251@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2252If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2253@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2254This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2255
2256@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2257@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2258This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2259it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2260
252b5132
RH
2261@kindex --whole-archive
2262@cindex including an entire archive
2263@item --whole-archive
2264For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2265@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2266in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2267files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2268library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2269library. This option may be used more than once.
2270
7ec229ce 2271Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2272about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2273Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2274list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2275your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2276
2509a395
SL
2277@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2278@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2279Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2280@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2281undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2282@var{symbol}.
2283
2284This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2285wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2286wishes to call the system function, it should call
2287@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2288
2289Here is a trivial example:
2290
2291@smallexample
2292void *
cc2f008e 2293__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2294@{
cc2f008e 2295 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2296 return __real_malloc (c);
2297@}
2298@end smallexample
2299
ff5dcc92 2300If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2301all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2302instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2303call the real @code{malloc} function.
2304
2305You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2306links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2307you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2308file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2309call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2310
6aa29e7b 2311@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2312@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2313@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2314@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2315Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2316(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2317section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2318
e41b3a13
JJ
2319@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2320@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2321Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2322generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2323if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2324
6c1439be
L
2325@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2326@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2327@item --enable-new-dtags
2328@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2329This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2330systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2331@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2332and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2333If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2334created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2335those options are only available for ELF systems.
2336
2d643429 2337@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2338@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2339Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2340close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2341time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2342increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2343value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2344
fdc90cb4
JJ
2345@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2346@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2347Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2348@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2349new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2350the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2351hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2352
0ce398f1
L
2353@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2354@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2355@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2356@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2357@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2358@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2359@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2360@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2361On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2362compressed using zlib.
2363
2364@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2365sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2366DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2367instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2368also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2369sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2370
2371The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2372@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2373
2374Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2375sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2376for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2377uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2378
2379The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2380involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2381default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2382@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2383
35835446
JR
2384@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2385@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2386This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2387linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2388for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2389about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2390
4f9c04f7 2391Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23921021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2393run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2394has been used.
2395
2396The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2397enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2398
c0065db7
RM
2399@kindex --build-id
2400@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2401@item --build-id
2402@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2403Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2404or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2405unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2406@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2407@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2408@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2409the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2410string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2411@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2412is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2413
2414The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2415that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2416unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2417to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2418file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2419string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2420
2421Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2422@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2423@end table
2424
0285c67d
NC
2425@c man end
2426
36f63dca 2427@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2428
0285c67d
NC
2429@c man begin OPTIONS
2430
ff5dcc92 2431The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2432the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2433normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2434use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2435@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2436like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2437symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2438object file).
2439
2440In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2441support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2442PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2443values by either a space or an equals sign.
2444
ff5dcc92 2445@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2446
2447@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2448@item --add-stdcall-alias
2449If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2450as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2451[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2452
2453@kindex --base-file
2454@item --base-file @var{file}
2455Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2456addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2457@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2458[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2459
2460@kindex --dll
2461@item --dll
2462Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2463@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2464file.
bb10df36 2465[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2466
88183869
DK
2467@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2468@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2469@item --enable-long-section-names
2470@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2471The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2472the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2473for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2474fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2475to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2476allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2477disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2478generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2479as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2480with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2481GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2482information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2483option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2484section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2485when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2486image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2487[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2488
252b5132
RH
2489@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2490@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2491@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2492@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2493If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2494do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2495only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2496resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2497undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2498@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2499to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2500warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2501import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2502to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2503feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2504@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2505mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2506[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2507
522f09cd
KT
2508@kindex --leading-underscore
2509@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2510@item --leading-underscore
2511@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2512For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2513in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2514disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2515
252b5132
RH
2516@cindex DLLs, creating
2517@kindex --export-all-symbols
2518@item --export-all-symbols
2519If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2520be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2521otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2522explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2523attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2524option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2525@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2526@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2527exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2528re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2529such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2530@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2531@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2532Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2533not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2534extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2535(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2536These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2537@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2538@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2539@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2540@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2541[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2542
2543@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2544@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2545Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2546exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2547[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2548
2927aaca
NC
2549@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2550@item --exclude-all-symbols
2551Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2552[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2553
252b5132
RH
2554@kindex --file-alignment
2555@item --file-alignment
2556Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2557file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2558512.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2560
2561@cindex heap size
2562@kindex --heap
2563@item --heap @var{reserve}
2564@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2565Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2566to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2567committed.
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2569
2570@cindex image base
2571@kindex --image-base
2572@item --image-base @var{value}
2573Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2574the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2575is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2576your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2577other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2578for dlls.
bb10df36 2579[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2580
2581@kindex --kill-at
2582@item --kill-at
2583If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2584symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2585[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2586
26d2d8a2
BF
2587@kindex --large-address-aware
2588@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2589If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2590header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2591greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2592or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2593section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2594[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2595
f69a2f97
NC
2596@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2597@item --disable-large-address-aware
2598Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2599This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2600driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2601addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2602[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2603
252b5132
RH
2604@kindex --major-image-version
2605@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2606Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2608
2609@kindex --major-os-version
2610@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2611Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2612[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2613
2614@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2615@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2616Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2617[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2618
2619@kindex --minor-image-version
2620@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2621Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2622[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2623
2624@kindex --minor-os-version
2625@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2626Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2627[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2628
2629@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2630@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2631Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2632[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2633
2634@cindex DEF files, creating
2635@cindex DLLs, creating
2636@kindex --output-def
2637@item --output-def @var{file}
2638The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2639file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2640(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2641library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2642automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2643[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2644
b044cda1 2645@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2646@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2647@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2648@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2649Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2650@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2651By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2652for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2653execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2654[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2655
2656@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2657@item --disable-auto-image-base
2658Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2659user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2660default.
bb10df36 2661[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2662
2663@cindex DLLs, linking to
2664@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2665@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2666When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2667search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2668@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2669between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2670uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2671@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2673
2674@kindex --enable-auto-import
2675@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2676Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2677DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2678building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2679'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2680to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2681specification published by Microsoft.
2682
e2a83dd0
NC
2683Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2684data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2685placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2686around a problem with consts that is described here:
2687http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2688
4d8907ac
DS
2689Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2690see this message:
0d888aac 2691
ece2d90e 2692"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2693documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2694
ece2d90e
NC
2695This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2696ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2697allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2698fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2699constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2700multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2701this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2702of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2703the warning, and exit.
2704
2705There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2706data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2707
2fa9fc65
NC
2708One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2709of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2710this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2711
c0065db7
RM
2712A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2713that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2714there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2715a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2716
2717@example
2718extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2719extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2720 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2721@end example
2722
2723or
2724
2725@example
2726extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2727extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2728 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2729@end example
2730
c0065db7 2731For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2732is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2733
2734@example
2735extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2736extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2737 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2738@end example
2739
c406afaf
NC
2740or
2741
2742@example
2743extern long long extern_ll;
2744extern_ll -->
2745 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2746@end example
2747
2fa9fc65 2748A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2749'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2750@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2751requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2752building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2753merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2754between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2755constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2756
2757Original:
2758@example
2759--foo.h
2760extern int arr[];
2761--foo.c
2762#include "foo.h"
2763void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2764 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2765@}
2766@end example
2767
2768Solution 1:
2769@example
2770--foo.h
2771extern int arr[];
2772--foo.c
2773#include "foo.h"
2774void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2775 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2776 volatile int *parr = arr;
2777 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2778@}
2779@end example
2780
2781Solution 2:
2782@example
2783--foo.h
2784/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2785#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2786 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2787#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2788#else
2789#define FOO_IMPORT
2790#endif
2791extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2792--foo.c
2793#include "foo.h"
2794void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2795 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2796@}
2797@end example
2798
c0065db7 2799A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2800library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2801for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2802functions).
bb10df36 2803[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2804
2805@kindex --disable-auto-import
2806@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2807Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2808@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2809[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2810
2fa9fc65
NC
2811@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2812@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2813If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2814that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2815a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2816environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2817[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2818
2819@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2820@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2821Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2822DLLs.
bb10df36 2823[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2824
b044cda1
CW
2825@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2826@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2827Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2828[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2829
252b5132
RH
2830@kindex --section-alignment
2831@item --section-alignment
2832Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2833addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2834[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2835
2836@cindex stack size
2837@kindex --stack
2838@item --stack @var{reserve}
2839@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2840Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2841to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2842committed.
bb10df36 2843[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2844
2845@kindex --subsystem
2846@item --subsystem @var{which}
2847@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2848@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2849Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2850legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2851@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2852the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2853@var{which}.
bb10df36 2854[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2855
2f563b51
DK
2856The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2857of the PE file header:
2858[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2859
2d5c3743
NC
2860@kindex --high-entropy-va
2861@item --high-entropy-va
2862Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2863(ASLR).
2864
2f563b51
DK
2865@kindex --dynamicbase
2866@item --dynamicbase
2867The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2868randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2869Vista for i386 PE targets.
2870
2871@kindex --forceinteg
2872@item --forceinteg
2873Code integrity checks are enforced.
2874
2875@kindex --nxcompat
2876@item --nxcompat
2877The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2878This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2879
2880@kindex --no-isolation
2881@item --no-isolation
2882Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2883
2884@kindex --no-seh
2885@item --no-seh
2886The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2887this image.
2888
2889@kindex --no-bind
2890@item --no-bind
2891Do not bind this image.
2892
2893@kindex --wdmdriver
2894@item --wdmdriver
2895The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2896
2f563b51
DK
2897@kindex --tsaware
2898@item --tsaware
2899The image is Terminal Server aware.
2900
0cb112f7
CF
2901@kindex --insert-timestamp
2902@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2903@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2904Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2905as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2906other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2907will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2908same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2909can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2910that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2911identically.
252b5132
RH
2912@end table
2913
0285c67d
NC
2914@c man end
2915
ac145307
BS
2916@ifset C6X
2917@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2918
2919@c man begin OPTIONS
2920
2921The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2922libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2923all executables use an index of 0.
2924
2925@table @gcctabopt
2926
2927@kindex --dsbt-size
2928@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2929This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2930or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2931entries.
2932
2933@kindex --dsbt-index
2934@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2935This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2936to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2937executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2938@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2939
fbd9ad90
PB
2940@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2941The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2942exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2943
ac145307
BS
2944@end table
2945
2946@c man end
2947@end ifset
2948
93fd0973
SC
2949@ifset M68HC11
2950@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2951
2952@c man begin OPTIONS
2953
2954The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2955memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2956
2957@table @gcctabopt
2958
2959@kindex --no-trampoline
2960@item --no-trampoline
2961This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2962is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2963instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2964
2965@kindex --bank-window
2966@item --bank-window @var{name}
2967This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2968the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2969The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2970paging and addresses within the memory window.
2971
2972@end table
2973
2974@c man end
2975@end ifset
2976
7fb9f789
NC
2977@ifset M68K
2978@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2979
2980@c man begin OPTIONS
2981
2982The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2983when linking for 68K targets.
2984
2985@table @gcctabopt
2986
2987@kindex --got
2988@item --got=@var{type}
2989This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2990@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2991@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2992Info entry for @file{ld}.
2993
2994@end table
2995
2996@c man end
2997@end ifset
2998
833794fc
MR
2999@ifset MIPS
3000@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3001
3002@c man begin OPTIONS
3003
3004The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3005generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3006linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3007
3008@table @gcctabopt
3009
3010@kindex --insn32
3011@item --insn32
3012@kindex --no-insn32
3013@itemx --no-insn32
3014These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3015generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3016or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
301732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3018used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3019possible.
3020
8b10b0b3
MR
3021@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3022@item --ignore-branch-isa
3023@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3024@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3025These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3026transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3027accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3028is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3029instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3030equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3031calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3032a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3033an error.
3034
833794fc
MR
3035@end table
3036
3037@c man end
3038@end ifset
3039
252b5132
RH
3040@ifset UsesEnvVars
3041@node Environment
3042@section Environment Variables
3043
0285c67d
NC
3044@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3045
560e09e9 3046You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3047@ifclear SingleFormat
3048@code{GNUTARGET},
3049@end ifclear
3050@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3051
36f63dca 3052@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3053@kindex GNUTARGET
3054@cindex default input format
3055@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3056use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3057of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3058@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3059of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3060attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3061this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3062there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3063object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3064BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3065in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3066@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3067
3068@kindex LDEMULATION
3069@cindex default emulation
3070@cindex emulation, default
3071@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3072@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3073behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3074available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3075the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3076variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3077linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3078
3079@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3080@cindex demangling, default
3081Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3082@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3083default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3084a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3085may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3086options.
3087
0285c67d
NC
3088@c man end
3089@end ifset
3090
252b5132
RH
3091@node Scripts
3092@chapter Linker Scripts
3093
3094@cindex scripts
3095@cindex linker scripts
3096@cindex command files
3097Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3098written in the linker command language.
3099
3100The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3101the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3102the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3103more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3104direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3105described below.
3106
3107The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3108yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3109linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3110to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3111such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3112
3113You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3114line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3115default linker script.
3116
3117You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3118to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3119Linker Scripts}.
3120
3121@menu
3122* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3123* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3124* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3125* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3126* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3127* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3128* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3129* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3130* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3131* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3132* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3133@end menu
3134
3135@node Basic Script Concepts
3136@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3137@cindex linker script concepts
3138We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3139describe the linker script language.
3140
3141The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3142file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3143@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3144The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3145purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3146among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3147section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3148in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3149
3150Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3151also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3152contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3153the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3154A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3155area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3156loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3157which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3158of debugging information.
3159
3160Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3161first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3162the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3163@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3164section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3165same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3166is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3167(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3168based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3169RAM address would be the VMA.
3170
3171You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3172program with the @samp{-h} option.
3173
3174Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3175@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3176has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3177information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3178will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3179static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3180referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3181
3182You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3183program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3184option.
3185
3186@node Script Format
3187@section Linker Script Format
3188@cindex linker script format
3189Linker scripts are text files.
3190
3191You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3192either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3193symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3194generally ignored.
3195
3196Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3197If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3198otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3199double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3200file name.
3201
3202You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3203@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3204to whitespace.
3205
3206@node Simple Example
3207@section Simple Linker Script Example
3208@cindex linker script example
3209@cindex example of linker script
3210Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3211
3212The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3213@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3214memory layout of the output file.
3215
3216The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3217describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3218code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3219@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3220Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3221your input files.
3222
3223For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32240x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3225linker script which will do that:
3226@smallexample
3227SECTIONS
3228@{
3229 . = 0x10000;
3230 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3231 . = 0x8000000;
3232 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3233 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3234@}
3235@end smallexample
3236
3237You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3238followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3239descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3240
252b5132
RH
3241The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3242sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3243counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3244other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3245current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3246incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3247@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3248
3249The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3250required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3251after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3252which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3253wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3254means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3255
3256Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3257@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3258@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3259
3260The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3261the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3262at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3263output section, the value of the location counter will be
3264@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3265effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3266immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3267
3268The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3269alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3270example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3271sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3272may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3273sections.
3274
3275That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3276
3277@node Simple Commands
3278@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3279@cindex linker script simple commands
3280In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3281
3282@menu
3283* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3284* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3285@ifclear SingleFormat
3286* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3287@end ifclear
3288
4a93e180 3289* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3290* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3291@end menu
3292
3293@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3294@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3295@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3296@cindex start of execution
3297@cindex first instruction
3298@cindex entry point
3299The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3300point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3301entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3302@smallexample
3303ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3304@end smallexample
3305
3306There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3307entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3308stopping when one of them succeeds:
3309@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3310@item
252b5132 3311the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3312@item
252b5132 3313the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3314@item
3ab904c4
NC
3315the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3316targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3317check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3318@item
252b5132 3319the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3320@item
252b5132
RH
3321The address @code{0}.
3322@end itemize
3323
3324@node File Commands
36f63dca 3325@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3326@cindex linker script file commands
3327Several linker script commands deal with files.
3328
3329@table @code
3330@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3331@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3332@cindex including a linker script
3333Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3334be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3335with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
333610 levels deep.
3337
4006703d
NS
3338You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3339@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3340
252b5132
RH
3341@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3342@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3343@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3344@cindex input files in linker scripts
3345@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3346@cindex linker script input object files
3347The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3348in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3349
3350For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3351a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3352then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3353
3354In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3355script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3356
e3f2db7f
AO
3357In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3358with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3359located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3360for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3361open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3362linker will search through the archive library search path.
3363The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3364as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3365description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3366
ff5dcc92 3367If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3368name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3369@samp{-l}.
3370
3371When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3372files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3373script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3374
3375@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3376@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3377@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3378@cindex grouping input files
3379The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3380files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3381new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3382in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3383
b717d30e
JJ
3384@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3385@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3386@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3387This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3388commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3389as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3390with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3391when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3392@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3393and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3394setting afterwards.
3395
252b5132
RH
3396@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3397@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3398@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3399The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3400@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3401@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3402Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3403precedence.
3404
3405You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3406output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3407
3408@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3409@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3410@cindex library search path in linker script
3411@cindex archive search path in linker script
3412@cindex search path in linker script
3413The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3414@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3415@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3416on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3417are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3418the command line option are searched first.
3419
3420@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3421@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3422@cindex first input file
3423The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3424that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3425though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3426when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3427first file.
3428@end table
3429
3430@ifclear SingleFormat
3431@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3432@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3433A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3434
3435@table @code
3436@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3437@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3438@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3439@cindex output file format in linker script
3440The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3441output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3442exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3443(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3444line option takes precedence.
3445
3446You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3447formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3448This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3449desired endianness.
3450
3451If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3452will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3453output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3454used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3455
3456For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3457command:
3458@smallexample
3459OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3460@end smallexample
3461This says that the default format for the output file is
3462@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3463option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3464format.
3465
3466@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3467@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3468@cindex input file format in linker script
3469The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3470files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3471This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3472(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3473is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3474command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3475@end table
3476@end ifclear
3477
4a93e180
NC
3478@node REGION_ALIAS
3479@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3480@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3481@cindex region alias
3482@cindex region names
3483
3484Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3485@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3486
3487@smallexample
3488REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3489@end smallexample
3490
3491The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3492memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3493to memory regions. An example follows.
3494
3495Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3496memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3497that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3498non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3499access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3500read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3501sections:
3502
3503@itemize @bullet
3504@item
3505@code{.text} program code;
3506@item
3507@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3508@item
3509@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3510@item
3511@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3512@end itemize
3513
3514The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3515part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3516output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3517systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3518@code{C}:
3519@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3520@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3521@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3522@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3523@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3524@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3525@end multitable
3526The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3527loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3528the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3529the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3530
3531The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3532includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3533memory layout:
3534@smallexample
3535INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3536
3537SECTIONS
3538 @{
3539 .text :
3540 @{
3541 *(.text)
3542 @} > REGION_TEXT
3543 .rodata :
3544 @{
3545 *(.rodata)
3546 rodata_end = .;
3547 @} > REGION_RODATA
3548 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3549 @{
3550 data_start = .;
3551 *(.data)
3552 @} > REGION_DATA
3553 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3554 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3555 .bss :
3556 @{
3557 *(.bss)
3558 @} > REGION_BSS
3559 @}
3560@end smallexample
3561
3562Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3563regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3564variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3565@table @code
3566@item A
3567Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3568@smallexample
3569MEMORY
3570 @{
3571 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3572 @}
3573
3574REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3575REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3576REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3577REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3578@end smallexample
3579@item B
3580Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3581into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3582@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3583@smallexample
3584MEMORY
3585 @{
3586 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3587 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3588 @}
3589
3590REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3591REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3592REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3593REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3594@end smallexample
3595@item C
3596Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3597@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3598initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3599system start into the @code{RAM}.
3600@smallexample
3601MEMORY
3602 @{
3603 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3604 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3605 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3606 @}
3607
3608REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3609REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3610REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3611REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3612@end smallexample
3613@end table
3614
3615It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3616@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3617necessary:
3618@smallexample
3619#include <string.h>
3620
3621extern char data_start [];
3622extern char data_size [];
3623extern char data_load_start [];
3624
3625void copy_data(void)
3626@{
3627 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3628 @{
3629 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3630 @}
3631@}
3632@end smallexample
3633
252b5132 3634@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3635@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3636There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3637
3638@table @code
3639@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3640@kindex ASSERT
3641@cindex assertion in linker script
3642Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3643with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3644
fd1c4238
NC
3645Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3646take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3647inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3648for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3649symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3650
3651@smallexample
3652 .stack :
3653 @{
3654 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3655 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3656 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3657 @}
3658@end smallexample
3659
3660will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3661PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3662can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3663
3664@smallexample
3665 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3666 .stack :
3667 @{
3668 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3669 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3670 @}
3671@end smallexample
3672
3673will work.
3674
252b5132
RH
3675@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3676@kindex EXTERN
3677@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3678Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3679symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3680modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3681each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3682command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3683
3684@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3685@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3686@cindex common allocation in linker script
3687This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3688to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3689output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3690
4818e05f
AM
3691@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3692@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3693@cindex common allocation in linker script
3694This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3695command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3696to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3697
53d25da6
AM
3698@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3699@kindex INSERT
3700@cindex insert user script into default script
3701This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3702augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3703inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3704@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3705default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3706sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3707linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3708insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3709linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3710default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3711of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3712to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3713is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3714
3715@smallexample
3716SECTIONS
3717@{
3718 OVERLAY :
3719 @{
3720 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3721 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3722 @}
3723@}
3724INSERT AFTER .text;
3725@end smallexample
3726
252b5132
RH
3727@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3728@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3729@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3730This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3731references among certain output sections.
3732
3733In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3734using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3735will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3736errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3737a function defined in the other section.
3738
3739The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3740@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3741an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3742@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3743names.
3744
cdf96953
MF
3745@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3746@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3747@cindex cross references
3748This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3749references to one section from a list of other sections.
3750
3751The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3752output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3753a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3754there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3755must never call back.
3756
3757The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3758The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3759If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3760the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3761status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3762names, not input section names.
3763
252b5132
RH
3764@ifclear SingleFormat
3765@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3766@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3767@cindex machine architecture
3768@cindex architecture
3769Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3770of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3771architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3772the @samp{-f} option.
3773@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3774
3775@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3776@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3777This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3778@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3779in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3780@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3781@end table
3782
3783@node Assignments
3784@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3785@cindex assignment in scripts
3786@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3787@cindex variables, defining
3788You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3789the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3790
3791@menu
3792* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3793* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3794* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3795* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3796* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3797@end menu
3798
3799@node Simple Assignments
3800@subsection Simple Assignments
3801
3802You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3803
3804@table @code
3805@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3806@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3807@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3808@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3809@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3810@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3811@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3812@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3813@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3814@end table
3815
3816The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3817@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3818defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3819
3820The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3821may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3822
3823The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3824
3825Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3826
3827You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3828statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3829section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3830
3831The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3832expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3833
3834Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3835assignments may be used:
3836
3837@smallexample
3838floating_point = 0;
3839SECTIONS
3840@{
3841 .text :
3842 @{
3843 *(.text)
3844 _etext = .;
3845 @}
156e34dd 3846 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3847 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3848@}
3849@end smallexample
3850@noindent
3851In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3852zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3853the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3854defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3855upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3856
eb8476a6
MR
3857@node HIDDEN
3858@subsection HIDDEN
3859@cindex HIDDEN
3860For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3861exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3862
3863Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3864@code{HIDDEN}:
3865
3866@smallexample
3867HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3868SECTIONS
3869@{
3870 .text :
3871 @{
3872 *(.text)
3873 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3874 @}
3875 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3876 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3877@}
3878@end smallexample
3879@noindent
3880In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3881
252b5132
RH
3882@node PROVIDE
3883@subsection PROVIDE
3884@cindex PROVIDE
3885In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3886only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3887the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3888@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3889@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3890@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3891@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3892@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3893
3894Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3895@smallexample
3896SECTIONS
3897@{
3898 .text :
3899 @{
3900 *(.text)
3901 _etext = .;
3902 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3903 @}
3904@}
3905@end smallexample
3906
3907In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3908underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3909the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3910underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3911If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3912linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3913
7af8e998
L
3914@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3915@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3916@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3917Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3918hidden and won't be exported.
3919
73ae6183
NC
3920@node Source Code Reference
3921@subsection Source Code Reference
3922
3923Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3924intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3925a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3926symbol that does not have a value.
3927
3928Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3929transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3930stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3931prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3932mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3933of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3934variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3935linker script variable might be referred to as:
3936
3937@smallexample
3938 extern int foo;
3939@end smallexample
3940
3941But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3942
3943@smallexample
3944 _foo = 1000;
3945@end smallexample
3946
3947In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3948transformation has taken place.
3949
3950When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3951things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3952in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3953second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3954table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3955contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3956value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3957
3958@smallexample
3959 int foo = 1000;
3960@end smallexample
3961
10bf6894 3962creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3963holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3964number 1000 is initially stored.
3965
3966When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3967first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3968memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3969So:
3970
3971@smallexample
3972 foo = 1;
3973@end smallexample
3974
3975looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3976associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3977address. Whereas:
3978
3979@smallexample
3980 int * a = & foo;
3981@end smallexample
3982
10bf6894 3983looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3984and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3985the variable @samp{a}.
3986
3987Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3988the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3989an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3990
3991@smallexample
3992 foo = 1000;
3993@end smallexample
3994
3995creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3996the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3997address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3998linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3999access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4000
4001Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4002you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4003use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4004section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4005linker script contains these declarations:
4006
4007@smallexample
4008@group
4009 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4010 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4011 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4012@end group
4013@end smallexample
4014
4015Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4016
4017@smallexample
4018@group
4019 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4020
73ae6183
NC
4021 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4022@end group
4023@end smallexample
4024
4025Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4026Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4027arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4028
4029@smallexample
4030@group
4031 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4032
4033 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4034@end group
4035@end smallexample
4036
4037Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4038operators.
73ae6183 4039
252b5132 4040@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4041@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4042@kindex SECTIONS
4043The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4044into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4045
4046The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4047@smallexample
4048SECTIONS
4049@{
4050 @var{sections-command}
4051 @var{sections-command}
4052 @dots{}
4053@}
4054@end smallexample
4055
4056Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4057
4058@itemize @bullet
4059@item
4060an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4061@item
4062a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4063@item
4064an output section description
4065@item
4066an overlay description
4067@end itemize
4068
4069The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4070@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4071those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4072understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4073the layout of the output file.
4074
4075Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4076below.
4077
4078If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4079linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4080section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4081input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4082example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4083in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4084
4085@menu
4086* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4087* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4088* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4089* Input Section:: Input section description
4090* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4091* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4092* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4093* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4094* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4095@end menu
4096
4097@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4098@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4099The full description of an output section looks like this:
4100@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4101@group
7e7d5768 4102@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4103 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4104 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4105 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4106 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4107 @{
4108 @var{output-section-command}
4109 @var{output-section-command}
4110 @dots{}
abc9061b 4111 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4112@end group
4113@end smallexample
4114
4115Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4116
4117The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4118name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4119The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4120the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4121The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4122
4123Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4124
4125@itemize @bullet
4126@item
4127a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4128@item
4129an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4130@item
4131data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4132@item
4133a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4134@end itemize
4135
4136@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4137@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4138@cindex name, section
4139@cindex section name
4140The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4141meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4142support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4143must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4144example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4145output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4146names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4147quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4148characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4149commas must be quoted.
4150
4151The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4152Discarding}.
4153
4154@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4155@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4156@cindex address, section
4157@cindex section address
4158The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4159address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4160is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4161
4162If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4163section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4164to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4165alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4166contained within the output section.
4167
4168The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4169
4170@itemize @bullet
4171@item
4172If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4173is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4174in that region.
4175
4176@item
4177If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4178regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4179section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4180be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4181
4182@item
4183If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4184the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4185counter.
4186@end itemize
4187
4188@noindent
4189For example:
4190
252b5132
RH
4191@smallexample
4192.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4193@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4194
252b5132
RH
4195@noindent
4196and
ea5cae92 4197
252b5132
RH
4198@smallexample
4199.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4200@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4201
252b5132
RH
4202@noindent
4203are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4204@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4205counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4206counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4207input sections.
252b5132
RH
4208
4209The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4210For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4211so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4212do something like this:
4213@smallexample
4214.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4215@end smallexample
4216@noindent
4217This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4218aligned upward to the specified value.
4219
4220Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4221location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4222sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4223
4224@node Input Section
36f63dca 4225@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4226@cindex input sections
4227@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4228The most common output section command is an input section description.
4229
4230The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4231You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4232in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4233map the input files into your memory layout.
4234
4235@menu
4236* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4237* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4238* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4239* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4240* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4241@end menu
4242
4243@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4244@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4245@cindex input section basics
4246An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4247by a list of section names in parentheses.
4248
4249The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4250describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4251
4252The most common input section description is to include all input
4253sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4254include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4255@smallexample
4256*(.text)
4257@end smallexample
4258@noindent
18625d54 4259Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4260@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4261of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4262match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4263example:
252b5132 4264@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4265EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4266@end smallexample
4267@noindent
4268will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4269and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4270placed inside the section list, for example:
4271@smallexample
b4346c09 4272*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4273@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4274@noindent
4275The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4276two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4277more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4278
4279There are two ways to include more than one section:
4280@smallexample
4281*(.text .rdata)
4282*(.text) *(.rdata)
4283@end smallexample
4284@noindent
4285The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4286@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4287first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4288they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4289@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4290@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4291
8f1732fc
AB
4292When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4293is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4294immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4295@smallexample
4296*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4297@end smallexample
4298@noindent
4299will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4300@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4301from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4302exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4303could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4304@smallexample
4305*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4306@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4307@noindent
4308Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4309before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4310all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4311@smallexample
4312EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4313@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4314
252b5132
RH
4315You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4316You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4317needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4318@smallexample
4319data.o(.data)
4320@end smallexample
4321
ae17ab41
CM
4322To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4323of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4324
4325Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4326
4327@smallexample
4328@group
4329SECTIONS @{
4330 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4331 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4332@}
4333@end group
4334@end smallexample
4335
4336In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4337input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4338@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4339@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4340whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4341
967928e9
AM
4342You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4343matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4344with no whitespace around the colon.
4345
4346@table @samp
4347@item archive:file
4348matches file within archive
4349@item archive:
4350matches the whole archive
4351@item :file
4352matches file but not one in an archive
4353@end table
4354
4355Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4356wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4357single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4358@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4359within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4360also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4361other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4362from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4363command.
4364
252b5132
RH
4365If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4366the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4367commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4368@smallexample
4369data.o
4370@end smallexample
4371
967928e9
AM
4372When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4373and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4374characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4375name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4376did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4377though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4378@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4379the archive search path.
4380
4381@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4382@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4383@cindex input section wildcards
4384@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4385@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4386@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4387In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4388name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4389
4390The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4391pattern for the file name.
4392
4393The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4394
4395@table @samp
4396@item *
4397matches any number of characters
4398@item ?
4399matches any single character
4400@item [@var{chars}]
4401matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4402character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4403@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4404@item \
4405quotes the following character
4406@end table
4407
4408When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4409will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4410Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4411exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4412@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4413a @samp{/} character.
4414
4415File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4416specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4417does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4418
4419If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4420appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4421will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4422sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4423@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4424@smallexample
4425.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4426.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4427@end smallexample
4428
bcaa7b3e 4429@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4430Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4431in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4432this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4433pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4434@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4435into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4436
bcaa7b3e
L
4437@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4438@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4439difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4440descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4441Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4442reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4443
02ecc8e9
L
4444@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4445@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4446difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4447ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4448encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4449
bcaa7b3e
L
4450@cindex SORT
4451@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4452
4453When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4454can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4455
4456@enumerate
4457@item
4458@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4459It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4460sections have the same name.
4461@item
4462@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4463It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4464sections have the same alignment.
4465@item
c0065db7 4466@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4467treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4468@item
4469@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4470is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4471@item
4472All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4473@end enumerate
4474
4475When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4476section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4477takes precedence over the command line option.
4478
4479If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4480command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4481treated as nested sorting command.
4482
4483@enumerate
4484@item
4485@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4486@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4487@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4488@item
4489@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4490@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4491@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4492@end enumerate
4493
4494If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4495command line option will be ignored.
4496
eda680f8
L
4497@cindex SORT_NONE
4498@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4499section sorting option.
4500
252b5132
RH
4501If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4502@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4503precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4504
4505This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4506files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4507sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4508The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4509with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4510linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4511@smallexample
4512@group
4513SECTIONS @{
4514 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4515 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4516 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4517 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4518@}
4519@end group
4520@end smallexample
4521
4522@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4523@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4524@cindex common symbol placement
4525@cindex uninitialized data placement
4526A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4527file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4528linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4529named @samp{COMMON}.
4530
4531You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4532other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4533particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4534input files are placed in another section.
4535
4536In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4537@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4538@smallexample
4539.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4540@end smallexample
4541
4542@cindex scommon section
4543@cindex small common symbols
4544Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4545example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4546symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4547different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4548the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4549symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4550to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4551locations.
4552
4553@cindex [COMMON]
4554You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4555notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4556@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4557
4558@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4559@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4560@cindex KEEP
4561@cindex garbage collection
4562When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4563it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4564This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4565with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4566@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4567
4568@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4569@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4570The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4571to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4572start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4573@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4574follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4575@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4576@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4577All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4578files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4579
4580@smallexample
4581@group
4582SECTIONS @{
4583 outputa 0x10000 :
4584 @{
4585 all.o
4586 foo.o (.input1)
4587 @}
36f63dca
NC
4588@end group
4589@group
252b5132
RH
4590 outputb :
4591 @{
4592 foo.o (.input2)
4593 foo1.o (.input1)
4594 @}
36f63dca
NC
4595@end group
4596@group
252b5132
RH
4597 outputc :
4598 @{
4599 *(.input1)
4600 *(.input2)
4601 @}
4602@}
4603@end group
a1ab1d2a 4604@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4605
4606@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4607@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4608@cindex data
4609@cindex section data
4610@cindex output section data
4611@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4612@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4613@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4614@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4615@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4616You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4617@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4618an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4619parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4620value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4621counter.
4622
4623The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4624store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4625bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4626stored.
4627
4628For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4629of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4630@smallexample
4631BYTE(1)
4632LONG(addr)
4633@end smallexample
4634
4635When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4636same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4637target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4638@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4639@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4640
4641If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4642which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4643When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4644true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4645endianness of the first input object file.
4646
36f63dca 4647Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4648between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4649@smallexample
4650SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4651@end smallexample
4652whereas this will work:
4653@smallexample
4654SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4655@end smallexample
4656
252b5132
RH
4657@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4658@cindex holes, filling
4659@cindex unspecified memory
4660You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4661current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4662otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4663gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4664with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4665necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4666point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4667than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4668different parts of an output section.
4669
4670This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4671value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4672@smallexample
563e308f 4673FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4674@end smallexample
4675
4676The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4677section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4678part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4679entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4680precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4681expression.
252b5132
RH
4682
4683@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4684@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4685There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4686commands.
4687
4688@table @code
4689@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4690@cindex input filename symbols
4691@cindex filename symbols
4692@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4693The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4694The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4695file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4696the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4697
4698This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4699normally used for any other object file format.
4700
4701@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4702@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4703@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4704@item CONSTRUCTORS
4705When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4706unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4707destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4708arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4709automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4710For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4711linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4712@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4713ignored for other object file formats.
4714
4715The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4716constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4717Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4718the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4719first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4720of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4721compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4722formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4723@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4724the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4725destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4726@code{exit}.
4727
4728For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4729arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4730addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4731and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4732linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4733runtime code expects to see.
4734
4735@smallexample
4736 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4737 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4738 *(.ctors)
4739 LONG(0)
4740 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4741 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4742 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4743 *(.dtors)
4744 LONG(0)
4745 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4746@end smallexample
4747
4748If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4749which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4750are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4751are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4752command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4753@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4754@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4755@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4756
4757Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4758and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4759need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4760scripts.
4761
4762@end table
4763
4764@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4765@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4766@cindex discarding sections
4767@cindex sections, discarding
4768@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4769The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4770This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4771may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4772@smallexample
49c13adb 4773.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4774@end smallexample
4775@noindent
4776will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4777@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4778sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4779space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4780too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4781space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4782@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4783@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4784This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4785
a0976ea4 4786The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4787on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4788symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4789the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4790section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4791
4792@cindex /DISCARD/
4793The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4794input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4795section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4796
4797@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4798@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4799@cindex output section attributes
4800We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4801like this:
0c71d759 4802
252b5132 4803@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4804@group
7e7d5768 4805@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4806 [AT(@var{lma})]
4807 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4808 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4809 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4810 @{
4811 @var{output-section-command}
4812 @var{output-section-command}
4813 @dots{}
562d3460 4814 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4815@end group
4816@end smallexample
0c71d759 4817
252b5132
RH
4818We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4819@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4820remaining section attributes.
4821
a1ab1d2a 4822@menu
252b5132
RH
4823* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4824* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4825* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4826* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4827* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4828* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4829* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4830* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4831@end menu
4832
4833@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4834@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4835Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4836parentheses. The following types are defined:
4837
4838@table @code
4839@item NOLOAD
4840The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4841loaded into memory when the program is run.
4842@item DSECT
4843@itemx COPY
4844@itemx INFO
4845@itemx OVERLAY
4846These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4847rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4848marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4849section when the program is run.
4850@end table
4851
4852@kindex NOLOAD
4853@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4854@cindex loading, preventing
4855The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4856the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4857the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4858@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4859need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4860@smallexample
4861@group
4862SECTIONS @{
4863 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4864 @dots{}
4865@}
4866@end group
4867@end smallexample
4868
4869@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4870@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4871@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4872@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4873@cindex load address
4874@cindex section load address
4875Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4876@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4877@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4878specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4879address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4880
ea5cae92
NC
4881The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4882specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4883takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4884load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4885region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4886
4887If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4888section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4889load address:
4890
4891@itemize @bullet
4892@item
4893If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4894the LMA address as well.
4895
4896@item
4897If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4898
4899@item
4900Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4901with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4902section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4903VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4904the last section in the located region.
4905
4906@item
4907If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4908that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4909
4910@item
4911If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4912section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4913@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4914
4915@cindex ROM initialized data
4916@cindex initialized data in ROM
4917This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4918example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4919called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4920@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4921even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4922uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4923defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4924counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4925
4926@smallexample
4927@group
4928SECTIONS
4929 @{
4930 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4931 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4932 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4933 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4934 .bss 0x3000 :
4935 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4936@}
4937@end group
4938@end smallexample
4939
4940The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4941this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4942the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4943how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4944script.
4945
4946@smallexample
4947@group
4948extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4949char *src = &_etext;
4950char *dst = &_data;
4951
ea5cae92
NC
4952/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4953while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4954 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4955
ea5cae92 4956/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4957for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4958 *dst = 0;
4959@end group
4960@end smallexample
4961
bbf115d3
L
4962@node Forced Output Alignment
4963@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4964@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4965@cindex forcing output section alignment
4966@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4967You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4968alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4969intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4970
7e7d5768
AM
4971@node Forced Input Alignment
4972@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4973@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4974@cindex forcing input section alignment
4975@cindex input section alignment
4976You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4977SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4978sections, whether larger or smaller.
4979
0c71d759
NC
4980@node Output Section Constraint
4981@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4982@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4983@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4984@cindex constraints on output sections
4985You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4986of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4987read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4988@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4989
252b5132 4990@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4991@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4992@kindex >@var{region}
4993@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4994@cindex memory regions and sections
4995You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4996using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4997
4998Here is a simple example:
4999@smallexample
5000@group
5001MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5002SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5003@end group
5004@end smallexample
5005
5006@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5007@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5008@kindex :@var{phdr}
5009@cindex section, assigning to program header
5010@cindex program headers and sections
5011You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5012using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5013one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5014assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5015@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5016linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5017
5018Here is a simple example:
5019@smallexample
5020@group
5021PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5022SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5023@end group
5024@end smallexample
5025
5026@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5027@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5028@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5029@cindex section fill pattern
5030@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5031You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5032@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5033(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5034within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5035alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5036necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5037of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5038an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5039fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5040other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5041pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5042expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5043
5044You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5045output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5046
5047Here is a simple example:
5048@smallexample
5049@group
563e308f 5050SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5051@end group
5052@end smallexample
5053
5054@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5055@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5056@kindex OVERLAY
5057@cindex overlays
5058An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5059are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5060the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5061copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5062required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5063can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5064than another.
5065
5066Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5067@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5068output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5069command is as follows:
5070@smallexample
5071@group
5072OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5073 @{
5074 @var{secname1}
5075 @{
5076 @var{output-section-command}
5077 @var{output-section-command}
5078 @dots{}
5079 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5080 @var{secname2}
5081 @{
5082 @var{output-section-command}
5083 @var{output-section-command}
5084 @dots{}
5085 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5086 @dots{}
abc9061b 5087 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5088@end group
5089@end smallexample
5090
5091Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5092section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5093section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5094those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5095except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5096sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5097
abc9061b
CC
5098The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5099the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5100
252b5132
RH
5101The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5102addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5103memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5104whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5105and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5106and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5107
56dd11f0
NC
5108If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5109references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5110the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5111sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5112@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5113
5114For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5115provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5116defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5117@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5118the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5119within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5120symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5121
5122At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5123the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5124
5125Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5126@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5127@smallexample
5128@group
5129 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5130 @{
5131 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5132 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5133 @}
5134@end group
5135@end smallexample
5136@noindent
5137This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5138address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5139@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5140following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5141@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5142@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5143
5144C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5145like the following.
5146
5147@smallexample
5148@group
5149 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5150 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5151 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5152@end group
5153@end smallexample
5154
5155Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5156everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5157example could have been written identically as follows.
5158
5159@smallexample
5160@group
5161 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5162 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5163 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5164 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5165 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5166 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5167 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5168@end group
5169@end smallexample
5170
5171@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5172@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5173@kindex MEMORY
5174@cindex memory regions
5175@cindex regions of memory
5176@cindex allocating memory
5177@cindex discontinuous memory
5178The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5179memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5180
5181The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5182memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5183may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5184can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5185set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5186regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5187around to fit into the available regions.
5188
127fcdff
AB
5189A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5190however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5191specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5192@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5193@smallexample
5194@group
a1ab1d2a 5195MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5196 @{
5197 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5198 @dots{}
5199 @}
5200@end group
5201@end smallexample
5202
5203The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5204region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5205Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5206with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5207must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5208add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5209command.
252b5132
RH
5210
5211@cindex memory region attributes
5212The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5213whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5214not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5215@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5216section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5217the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5218them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5219
5220The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5221@table @samp
5222@item R
5223Read-only section
5224@item W
5225Read/write section
5226@item X
5227Executable section
5228@item A
5229Allocatable section
5230@item I
5231Initialized section
5232@item L
5233Same as @samp{I}
5234@item !
c09e9a8c 5235Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5236@end table
5237
5238If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5239@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5240attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5241in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5242attributes.
5243
5244@kindex ORIGIN =
5245@kindex o =
5246@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5247The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5248the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5249cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5250abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5251@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5252
5253@kindex LENGTH =
5254@kindex len =
5255@kindex l =
5256The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5257region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5258be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5259@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5260
5261In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5262available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5263and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5264linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5265is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5266or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5267explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5268region.
5269
5270@smallexample
5271@group
a1ab1d2a 5272MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5273 @{
5274 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5275 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5276 @}
5277@end group
5278@end smallexample
5279
5280Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5281specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5282@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5283a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5284output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5285was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5286the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5287output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5288region, the linker will issue an error message.
5289
3ec57632 5290It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5291expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5292@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5293
5294@smallexample
5295@group
c0065db7 5296 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5297@end group
5298@end smallexample
5299
252b5132
RH
5300@node PHDRS
5301@section PHDRS Command
5302@kindex PHDRS
5303@cindex program headers
5304@cindex ELF program headers
5305@cindex program segments
5306@cindex segments, ELF
5307The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5308@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5309loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5310program with the @samp{-p} option.
5311
5312When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5313reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5314program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5315This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5316interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5317
5318The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5319in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5320precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5321the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5322not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5323
5324The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5325generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5326ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5327
5328This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5329@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5330
5331@smallexample
5332@group
5333PHDRS
5334@{
5335 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5336 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5337@}
5338@end group
5339@end smallexample
5340
5341The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5342of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5343header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5344with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5345must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5346is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5347
5348Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5349system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5350specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5351sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5352attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5353Section Phdr}.
5354
5355It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5356merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5357repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5358contain the section.
5359
5360If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5361then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5362not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5363convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5364placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5365default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5366segment at all.
5367
5368@kindex FILEHDR
5369@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5370You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5371the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5372The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5373file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5374include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5375segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5376these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5377
5378The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5379value of the keyword.
5380
5381@table @asis
5382@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5383Indicates an unused program header.
5384
5385@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5386Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5387the file.
5388
5389@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5390Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5391
5392@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5393Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5394found.
5395
5396@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5397Indicates a segment holding note information.
5398
5399@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5400A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5401ABI.
5402
5403@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5404Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5405
1a9ccd70
NC
5406@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5407Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5408
252b5132
RH
5409@item @var{expression}
5410An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5411be used for types not defined above.
5412@end table
5413
5414You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5415in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5416@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5417Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5418output section attribute.
5419
5420The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5421which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5422explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5423an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5424header.
5425
5426Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5427headers used on a native ELF system.
5428
5429@example
5430@group
5431PHDRS
5432@{
5433 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5434 interp PT_INTERP ;
5435 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5436 data PT_LOAD ;
5437 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5438@}
5439
5440SECTIONS
5441@{
5442 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5443 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5444 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5445 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5446 @dots{}
5447 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5448 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5449 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5450 @dots{}
5451@}
5452@end group
5453@end example
5454
5455@node VERSION
5456@section VERSION Command
5457@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5458@cindex symbol versions
5459@cindex version script
5460@cindex versions of symbols
5461The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5462only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5463symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5464a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5465shared library.
5466
5467You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5468you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5469also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5470
5471The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5472@smallexample
5473VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5474@end smallexample
5475
5476The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5477Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5478version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5479version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5480version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5481scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5482library.
5483
5484The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5485examples.
5486
5487@smallexample
5488VERS_1.1 @{
5489 global:
5490 foo1;
5491 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5492 old*;
5493 original*;
5494 new*;
252b5132
RH
5495@};
5496
5497VERS_1.2 @{
5498 foo2;
5499@} VERS_1.1;
5500
5501VERS_2.0 @{
5502 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5503 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5504 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5505 "f(int, double)";
5506 @};
252b5132
RH
5507@} VERS_1.2;
5508@end smallexample
5509
5510This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5511version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5512The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5513a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5514of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5515symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5516is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5517in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5518However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5519name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5520
5521Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5522depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5523to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5524
5525Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5526depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5527and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5528
5529When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5530specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5531unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5532unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5533somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5534wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5535wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5536set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5537ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5538
5539The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5540they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5541could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5542However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5543
0f6bf451 5544Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5545in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5546symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5547won't.
5548
5549@smallexample
7c9c73be 5550@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5551@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5552
252b5132
RH
5553When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5554symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5555requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5556shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5557loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5558linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5559application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5560way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5561all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5562search for each symbol reference.
5563
5564The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5565doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5566that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5567functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5568the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5569required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5570that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5571versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5572the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5573
5574There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5575first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5576source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5577script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5578maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5579@smallexample
5580__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5581@end smallexample
5582@noindent
5583in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5584be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5585The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5586@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5587takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5588
5589The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5590function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5591an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5592version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5593linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5594
5595To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5596source file. Here is an example:
5597
5598@smallexample
5599__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5600__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5601__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5602__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5603@end smallexample
5604
5605In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5606unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5607example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5608@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5609
5610When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5611some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5612this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5613@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5614declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5615you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5616
5617If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5618within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5619(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5620specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5621
cb840a31
L
5622You can also specify the language in the version script:
5623
5624@smallexample
5625VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5626@end smallexample
5627
c0065db7 5628The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5629The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5630demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5631patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5632@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5633
86043bbb
MM
5634Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5635described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5636or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5637the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5638whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5639cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5640might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5641should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5642expect when you upgrade.
5643
252b5132
RH
5644@node Expressions
5645@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5646@cindex expressions
5647@cindex arithmetic
5648The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5649that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5650expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5651host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5652
5653You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5654
5655The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5656expressions.
5657
5658@menu
5659* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5660* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5661* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5662* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5663* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5664* Operators:: Operators
5665* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5666* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5667* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5668@end menu
5669
5670@node Constants
5671@subsection Constants
5672@cindex integer notation
5673@cindex constants in linker scripts
5674All constants are integers.
5675
5676As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5677octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5678hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5679@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5680@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5681value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5682
5683@cindex scaled integers
5684@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5685@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5686@cindex suffixes for integers
5687@cindex integer suffixes
5688In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5689constant by
5690@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5691@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5692@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5693@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5694@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5695@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5696@tex
5697${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5698@end tex
5699@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5700respectively. For example, the following
5701all refer to the same quantity:
5702
252b5132 5703@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5704_fourk_1 = 4K;
5705_fourk_2 = 4096;
5706_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5707_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5708@end smallexample
5709
8a308ae8
NC
5710Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5711conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5712
0c71d759
NC
5713@node Symbolic Constants
5714@subsection Symbolic Constants
5715@cindex symbolic constants
5716@kindex CONSTANT
5717It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5718the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5719
5720@table @code
5721@item MAXPAGESIZE
5722@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5723The target's maximum page size.
5724
5725@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5726@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5727The target's default page size.
5728@end table
5729
5730So for example:
5731
5732@smallexample
9d5777a3 5733 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5734@end smallexample
5735
5736will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5737supported by the target.
5738
252b5132
RH
5739@node Symbols
5740@subsection Symbol Names
5741@cindex symbol names
5742@cindex names
5743@cindex quoted symbol names
5744@kindex "
5745Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5746and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5747Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5748specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5749keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5750@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5751"SECTION" = 9;
5752"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5753@end smallexample
5754
5755Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5756to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5757whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5758
ecca9871
L
5759@node Orphan Sections
5760@subsection Orphan Sections
5761@cindex orphan
5762Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5763are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5764script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5765output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5766in which to place the orphaned input section.
5767
5768If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5769an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5770placed at the end of that output section.
5771
5772If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5773sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5774name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5775orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5776one new output section.
5777
5778If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5779then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5780in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5781linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5782attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5783sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5784support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5785
c005eb9e
AB
5786The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5787(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5788output sections an orphan is placed in.
5789
41911f68 5790If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5791the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5792__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5793section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5794orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5795representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5796character.
5797
252b5132
RH
5798@node Location Counter
5799@subsection The Location Counter
5800@kindex .
5801@cindex dot
5802@cindex location counter
5803@cindex current output location
5804The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5805current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5806location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5807within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5808anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5809
5810@cindex holes
5811Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5812moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5813location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5814and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5815doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5816
5817@smallexample
5818SECTIONS
5819@{
5820 output :
5821 @{
5822 file1(.text)
5823 . = . + 1000;
5824 file2(.text)
5825 . += 1000;
5826 file3(.text)
563e308f 5827 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5828@}
5829@end smallexample
5830@noindent
5831In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5832located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5833followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5834@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5835@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5836specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5837
5c6bbab8
NC
5838@cindex dot inside sections
5839Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5840current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5841statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5842absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5843however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5844not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5845
5846@smallexample
5847SECTIONS
5848@{
5849 . = 0x100
5850 .text: @{
5851 *(.text)
5852 . = 0x200
5853 @}
5854 . = 0x500
5855 .data: @{
5856 *(.data)
5857 . += 0x600
5858 @}
5859@}
5860@end smallexample
5861
5862The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5863and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5864the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5865much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5866move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5867and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5868the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5869the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5870
b5666f2f
AM
5871@cindex dot outside sections
5872Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5873output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5874needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5875
5876@smallexample
5877SECTIONS
5878@{
5879 start_of_text = . ;
5880 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5881 end_of_text = . ;
5882
5883 start_of_data = . ;
5884 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5885 end_of_data = . ;
5886@}
5887@end smallexample
5888
5889If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5890not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5891between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5892should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5893blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5894the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5895sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5896statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5897special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5898place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5899as follows:
5900
5901@smallexample
5902SECTIONS
5903@{
5904 start_of_text = . ;
5905 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5906 end_of_text = . ;
5907
5908 start_of_data = . ;
5909 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5910 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5911 end_of_data = . ;
5912@}
5913@end smallexample
5914
5915This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5916@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5917placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5918assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5919a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5920section. So you could write:
5921
5922@smallexample
5923SECTIONS
5924@{
5925 start_of_text = . ;
5926 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5927 end_of_text = . ;
5928
5929 . = . ;
5930 start_of_data = . ;
5931 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5932 end_of_data = . ;
5933@}
5934@end smallexample
5935
5936Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5937@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5938
252b5132
RH
5939@need 2000
5940@node Operators
5941@subsection Operators
5942@cindex operators for arithmetic
5943@cindex arithmetic operators
5944@cindex precedence in expressions
5945The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5946the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5947@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5948@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5949@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5950@smallexample
5951precedence associativity Operators Notes
5952(highest)
59531 left ! - ~ (1)
59542 left * / %
59553 left + -
59564 left >> <<
59575 left == != > < <= >=
59586 left &
59597 left |
59608 left &&
59619 left ||
596210 right ? :
596311 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5964(lowest)
5965@end smallexample
5966Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5967(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5968(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5969@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5970@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5971@tex
5972\vskip \baselineskip
5973%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5974\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5975\hrule
5976\halign
5977{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5978height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5979&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5980height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5981\noalign{\hrule}
5982height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5983&highest&&&&&\cr
5984% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5985&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5986&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5987&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5988&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5989&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5990&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5991&7&&left&&|&\cr
5992&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5993&9&&left&&||&\cr
5994&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5995&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5996&lowest&&&&&\cr
5997height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5998\hrule}
5999@end tex
6000@iftex
6001{
6002@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6003@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6004@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6005}
6006@end iftex
6007@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6008
6009@node Evaluation
6010@subsection Evaluation
6011@cindex lazy evaluation
6012@cindex expression evaluation order
6013The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6014an expression when absolutely necessary.
6015
6016The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6017address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6018regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6019as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6020
6021However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6022until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6023other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6024for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6025
6026The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6027assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6028allocation.
6029
6030Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6031@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6032
6033If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6034available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6035following
6036@smallexample
6037@group
6038SECTIONS
6039 @{
a1ab1d2a 6040 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6041 @{ *(.text) @}
6042 @}
6043@end group
6044@end smallexample
6045@noindent
6046will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6047address}.
6048
6049@node Expression Section
6050@subsection The Section of an Expression
6051@cindex expression sections
6052@cindex absolute expressions
6053@cindex relative expressions
6054@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6055@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6056@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6057Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6058relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6059using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6060value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6061symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6062operations.
6063
abf4be64
AM
6064Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6065section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6066address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6067@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6068functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6069One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6070(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6071differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6072versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6073section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6074Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6075absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6076given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6077everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6078
6079In the following simple example,
252b5132 6080
7542af2a
AM
6081@smallexample
6082@group
6083SECTIONS
6084 @{
6085 . = 0x100;
6086 __executable_start = 0x100;
6087 .data :
6088 @{
6089 . = 0x10;
6090 __data_start = 0x10;
6091 *(.data)
6092 @}
6093 @dots{}
6094 @}
6095@end group
6096@end smallexample
252b5132 6097
7542af2a
AM
6098both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6099address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6100@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6101section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6102
5c3049d2
AM
6103For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6104addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6105
6106@itemize @bullet
6107@item
c05f749e
AM
6108Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6109operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6110absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6111@item
7542af2a
AM
6112Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6113relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6114and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6115@item
c05f749e
AM
6116Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6117in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6118address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6119before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6120@end itemize
6121
6122The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6123
6124@itemize @bullet
6125@item
6126An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6127@item
6128The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6129@item
9bc8bb33 6130The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6131relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6132(after above conversions) is also a number when
6133@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6134but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6135@item
6136The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6137relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6138section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6139@item
6140The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6141conversions) is an absolute address.
6142@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6143
6144You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6145to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6146create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6147section @samp{.data}:
6148@smallexample
6149SECTIONS
6150 @{
6151 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6152 @}
6153@end smallexample
6154@noindent
6155If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6156@samp{.data} section.
6157
7542af2a
AM
6158Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6159particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6160
252b5132
RH
6161@node Builtin Functions
6162@subsection Builtin Functions
6163@cindex functions in expressions
6164The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6165use in linker script expressions.
6166
6167@table @code
6168@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6169@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6170@cindex expression, absolute
6171Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6172of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6173value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6174normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6175
6176@item ADDR(@var{section})
6177@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6178@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6179Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6180script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6181the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6182@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6183@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6184the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6185@smallexample
6186@group
6187SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6188 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6189 @{
252b5132
RH
6190 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6191 @dots{}
6192 @}
6193 .output :
6194 @{
6195 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6196 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6197 @}
6198@dots{} @}
6199@end group
6200@end smallexample
6201
876f4090
NS
6202@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6203@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6204@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6205@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6206@cindex round up location counter
6207@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6208@cindex round up expression
6209@cindex align expression
6210Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6211to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6212doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6213arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6214expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6215equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6216
6217Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6218next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6219variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6220input sections:
252b5132
RH
6221@smallexample
6222@group
6223SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6224 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6225 *(.data)
6226 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6227 @}
6228@dots{} @}
6229@end group
6230@end smallexample
6231@noindent
6232The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6233a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6234a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6235of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6236
6237The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6238
362c1d1a
NS
6239@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6240@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6241@cindex section alignment
6242Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6243been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6244evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6245the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6246value in that section.
6247@smallexample
6248@group
6249SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6250 .output @{
6251 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6252 @dots{}
6253 @}
6254@dots{} @}
6255@end group
6256@end smallexample
6257
252b5132
RH
6258@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6259@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6260This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6261scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6262section.
6263
2d20f7bf
JJ
6264@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6265@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6266This is equivalent to either
6267@smallexample
6268(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6269@end smallexample
6270or
6271@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6272(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6273 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6274@end smallexample
6275@noindent
6276depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6277for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6278@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6279If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6280memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6281bytes in the on-disk file.
6282
6283This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6284any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6285@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6286be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6287working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6288
6289@noindent
6290Example:
6291@smallexample
6292 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6293@end smallexample
6294
6295@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6296@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6297This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6298evaluation purposes.
6299
6300@smallexample
6301 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6302@end smallexample
6303
a4f5ad88
JJ
6304@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6305@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6306This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6307@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6308When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6309does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6310@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6311boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6312it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6313@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6314padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6315section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6316
6317@smallexample
6318 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6319@end smallexample
6320
252b5132
RH
6321@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6322@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6323@cindex symbol defaults
6324Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6325defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6326return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6327default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6328shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6329the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6330existed, its value is preserved:
6331
6332@smallexample
6333@group
6334SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6335 .text : @{
6336 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6337 @dots{}
6338 @}
6339 @dots{}
6340@}
6341@end group
6342@end smallexample
6343
3ec57632
NC
6344@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6345@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6346Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6347
252b5132
RH
6348@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6349@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6350@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6351Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6352Section LMA}).
6353
2e53f7d6
NC
6354@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6355@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6356Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6357@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6358
252b5132
RH
6359@kindex MAX
6360@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6361Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6362
6363@kindex MIN
6364@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6365Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6366
6367@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6368@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6369@cindex unallocated address, next
6370Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6371This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6372use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6373output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6374
3ec57632
NC
6375@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6376@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6377Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6378
ba916c8a
MM
6379@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6380@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6381Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6382value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6383@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6384will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6385can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6386``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6387name.
6388
252b5132
RH
6389@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6390@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6391@cindex section size
6392Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6393been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6394evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6395@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6396@smallexample
6397@group
6398SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6399 .output @{
6400 .start = . ;
6401 @dots{}
6402 .end = . ;
6403 @}
6404 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6405 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6406@dots{} @}
6407@end group
6408@end smallexample
6409
6410@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6411@itemx sizeof_headers
6412@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6413@cindex header size
6414Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6415information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6416this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6417choose, to facilitate paging.
6418
6419@cindex not enough room for program headers
6420@cindex program headers, not enough room
6421When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6422@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6423number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6424addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6425additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6426room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6427the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6428script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6429you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6430command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6431@end table
6432
6433@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6434@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6435@cindex implicit linker scripts
6436If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6437an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6438linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6439linker will report an error.
6440
6441An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6442
6443Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6444assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6445commands.
6446
6447Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6448at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6449read. This can affect archive searching.
6450
6451@ifset GENERIC
6452@node Machine Dependent
6453@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6454
6455@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6456@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6457sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6458functionality are not listed.
6459
6460@menu
36f63dca
NC
6461@ifset H8300
6462* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6463@end ifset
6464@ifset I960
6465* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6466@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6467@ifset M68HC11
6468* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6469@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6470@ifset ARM
6471* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6472@end ifset
6473@ifset HPPA
6474* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6475@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6476@ifset M68K
6477* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6478@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6479@ifset MIPS
6480* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6481@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6482@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6483* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6484@end ifset
2469cfa2 6485@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6486* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6487@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6488@ifset NDS32
6489* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6490@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6491@ifset NIOSII
6492* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6493@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6494@ifset POWERPC
6495* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6496@end ifset
6497@ifset POWERPC64
6498* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6499@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6500@ifset SPU
6501* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6502@end ifset
74459f0e 6503@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6504* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6505@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6506@ifset WIN32
6507* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6508@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6509@ifset XTENSA
6510* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6511@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6512@end menu
6513@end ifset
6514
252b5132
RH
6515@ifset H8300
6516@ifclear GENERIC
6517@raisesections
6518@end ifclear
6519
6520@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6521@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6522
6523@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6524For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6525you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6526
6527@table @emph
6528@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6529@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6530@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6531targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6532program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6533respectively.
6534
6535@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6536@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6537@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6538@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6539sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6540page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6541(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6542@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6543top page of memory).
1502569c 6544
81f5558e
NC
6545@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6546indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6547displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6548the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6549@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6550whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6551range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6552
1502569c 6553@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6554@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6555biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6556which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6557page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6558(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6559@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6560the top page of memory).
6561
6562@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6563@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
656432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6565changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6566(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6567@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6568the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6569@end table
6570
6571@ifclear GENERIC
6572@lowersections
6573@end ifclear
6574@end ifset
6575
36f63dca 6576@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6577@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6578@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6579@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6580@node Renesas
6581@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6582
c2dcd04e
NC
6583@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6584H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6585options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6586@end ifset
6587@end ifclear
6588
6589@ifset I960
6590@ifclear GENERIC
6591@raisesections
6592@end ifclear
6593
6594@node i960
6595@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6596
6597@cindex i960 support
6598
6599You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6600specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6601family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6602incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6603linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6604libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6605search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6606
6607For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6608well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6609paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6610the names
6611
6612@smallexample
6613@group
6614try
6615libtry.a
6616tryca
6617libtryca.a
6618@end group
6619@end smallexample
6620
6621@noindent
6622The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6623two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6624
6625You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6626the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6627use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6628specifies a library.
6629
6630@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6631@cindex relaxing on i960
6632@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6633you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6634@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6635them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6636instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6637instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6638target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6639not itself call any subroutines).
6640
6641@ifclear GENERIC
6642@lowersections
6643@end ifclear
6644@end ifset
6645
6646@ifset ARM
6647@ifclear GENERIC
6648@raisesections
6649@end ifclear
6650
93fd0973
SC
6651@ifset M68HC11
6652@ifclear GENERIC
6653@raisesections
6654@end ifclear
6655
6656@node M68HC11/68HC12
6657@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6658
6659@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6660
6661@subsection Linker Relaxation
6662
6663For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6664optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6665
6666@table @emph
6667@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6668@item relaxing address modes
6669@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6670targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6671program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6672respectively.
6673
6674@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6675transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6676page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6677
6678@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6679When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6680of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6681addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6682@code{bset} instructions.
6683
6684@end table
6685
6686@subsection Trampoline Generation
6687
6688@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6689@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6690For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6691call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6692will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6693trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6694case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6695point to the function trampoline.
6696
6697@ifclear GENERIC
6698@lowersections
6699@end ifclear
6700@end ifset
6701
36f63dca 6702@node ARM
3674e28a 6703@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6704
6705@cindex ARM interworking support
6706@kindex --support-old-code
6707For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6708between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6709been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6710line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6711libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6712option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6713given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6714which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6715the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6716non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6717
6718@cindex thumb entry point
6719@cindex entry point, thumb
6720@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6721The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6722@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6723But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6724branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6725executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6726
ce11ba6c
KT
6727@cindex PE import table prefixing
6728@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6729The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6730the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6731element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6732import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6733
e489d0ae
PB
6734@cindex BE8
6735@kindex --be8
6736The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6737executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6738objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6739option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6740little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6741
3674e28a
PB
6742@cindex TARGET1
6743@kindex --target1-rel
6744@kindex --target1-abs
6745The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6746@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6747or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6748and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6749
6750@cindex TARGET2
6751@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6752The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6753@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6754meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6755@table @samp
6756@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6757@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6758@item abs
6759@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6760@item got-rel
6761@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6762@end table
6763
319850b4
JB
6764@cindex FIX_V4BX
6765@kindex --fix-v4bx
6766The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6767specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6768interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6769also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6770
6771In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6772linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6773@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6774
6775In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6776relocations are ignored.
6777
845b51d6
PB
6778@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6779@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6780Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6781relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6782
6783@smallexample
6784TST rM, #1
6785MOVEQ PC, rM
6786BX Rn
6787@end smallexample
6788
6789This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6790and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6791condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6792
33bfe774
JB
6793@cindex USE_BLX
6794@kindex --use-blx
6795The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6796BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6797situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6798code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6799each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6800
6801This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6802specify it if you are using that target.
6803
c6dd86c6
JB
6804@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6805@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6806The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6807bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6808instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6809to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6810the support code can read the intended values.
6811
6812The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6813intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6814and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6815intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6816full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6817you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6818
6819If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6820enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6821@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6822mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6823vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6824@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6825
6826If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6827potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6828such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6829first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6830instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6831the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6832are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6833
2de70689
MGD
6834@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6835@kindex --fix-arm1176
6836@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6837The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6838in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6839are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6840unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6841
9d5777a3 6842Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6843Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6844http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6845
a504d23a
LA
6846@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6847@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6848
6849The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6850workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6851the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6852off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6853the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6854core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6855integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6856VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6857
6858The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6859necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6860
6861The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6862@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6863STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6864linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6865@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6866
6867If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6868potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6869such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6870replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6871branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6872then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6873
6874The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6875the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6876
6877The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6878they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6879there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6880occurs.
6881
6882The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6883PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6884large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6885cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6886occurs.
6887
bf21ed78
MS
6888@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6889@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6890The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6891warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6892enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6893linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6894using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6895not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6896
6897@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6898@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6899The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6900warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6901@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6902linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6903using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6904
726150b7
NC
6905@cindex PIC_VENEER
6906@kindex --pic-veneer
6907The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6908ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6909is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6910@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6911
6912@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6913@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6914The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6915code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6916perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6917placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6918controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6919The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6920duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6921group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6922code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6923where they should be placed.
6924
6925The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6926@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6927placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6928branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6929placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6930value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6931exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6932A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6933linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6934from the input sections.
6935
6936The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6937@samp{N = +1}.
6938
1a51c1a4
NC
6939Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6940only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6941otherwise.
6942
1db37fe6
YG
6943@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6944@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6945@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6946The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6947
6948The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6949
68fcca92
JW
6950@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6951@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6952@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6953The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6954
6955Please contact ARM for further details.
6956
1db37fe6
YG
6957@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6958@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6959@cindex Merging exidx entries
6960The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6961
6962@kindex --long-plt
6963@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6964The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6965which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6966entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6967
1f56df9d
JW
6968@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6969@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6970The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6971link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6972
4ba2ef8f
TP
6973@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6974All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6975Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6976@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6977veneers in memory.
6978
54ddd295
TP
6979@kindex --cmse-implib
6980@cindex Secure gateway import library
6981The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6982specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6983secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6984executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6985
0955507f
TP
6986@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6987@cindex Input import library
6988The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6989must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6990given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6991in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6992@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6993library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6994library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6995for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6996specified.
6997
36f63dca
NC
6998@ifclear GENERIC
6999@lowersections
7000@end ifclear
7001@end ifset
7002
7003@ifset HPPA
7004@ifclear GENERIC
7005@raisesections
7006@end ifclear
7007
7008@node HPPA ELF32
7009@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7010@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7011@kindex --multi-subspace
7012When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7013import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7014The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7015stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7016multiple sub-spaces.
7017
7018@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7019@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7020Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7021stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7022@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7023sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7024a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7025the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7026conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7027prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7028A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7029branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7030@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7031@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7032detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7033positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7034
7035Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7036single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7037create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7038large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7039
7040@ifclear GENERIC
7041@lowersections
7042@end ifclear
7043@end ifset
7044
7fb9f789
NC
7045@ifset M68K
7046@ifclear GENERIC
7047@raisesections
7048@end ifclear
7049
7050@node M68K
7051@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7052
7053@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7054@kindex --got=@var{type}
7055The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7056The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7057@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7058the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7059@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7060entries only at non-negative offsets.
7061@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7062entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7063support such GOTs.
7064@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7065output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7066file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7067files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7068
7069@ifclear GENERIC
7070@lowersections
7071@end ifclear
7072@end ifset
7073
833794fc
MR
7074@ifset MIPS
7075@ifclear GENERIC
7076@raisesections
7077@end ifclear
7078
7079@node MIPS
7080@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7081
7082@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7083@kindex --insn32
7084@kindex --no-insn32
7085The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7086microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7087in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7088used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7089or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7090including 16-bit ones where possible.
7091
8b10b0b3
MR
7092@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7093@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7094@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7095The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7096control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7097@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7098relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7099calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7100relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7101instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7102or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7103the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7104
833794fc
MR
7105@ifclear GENERIC
7106@lowersections
7107@end ifclear
7108@end ifset
7109
36f63dca
NC
7110@ifset MMIX
7111@ifclear GENERIC
7112@raisesections
7113@end ifclear
7114
7115@node MMIX
7116@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7117For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7118@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7119understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7120can translate between the two formats.
7121
7122There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7123Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7124registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7125equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7126@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7127global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7128this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7129symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7130
7a2de473
HPN
7131Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7132@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7133The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7134of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7135
7136Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7137are left out from an mmo file.
7138
7139@ifclear GENERIC
7140@lowersections
7141@end ifclear
7142@end ifset
7143
7144@ifset MSP430
7145@ifclear GENERIC
7146@raisesections
7147@end ifclear
7148
7149@node MSP430
7150@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7151For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7152will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7153just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7154
7155@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7156The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7157
7158@table @code
7159@item @samp{.vectors}
7160Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7161
7162@item @samp{.bootloader}
7163Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7164in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7165
7166@item @samp{.infomem}
7167Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7168this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7169
c0065db7 7170@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7171This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7172in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7173
7174@item @samp{.noinit}
7175Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7176
c0065db7 7177The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7178@end table
7179
7180@ifclear GENERIC
7181@lowersections
7182@end ifclear
7183@end ifset
7184
35c08157
KLC
7185@ifset NDS32
7186@ifclear GENERIC
7187@raisesections
7188@end ifclear
7189
7190@node NDS32
7191@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7192@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7193For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7194relaxes objects according to these options.
7195
7196@table @code
7197@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7198Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7199
7200@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7201Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7202
7203@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7204Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7205
7206@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7207Export the EX9 table after linking.
7208
7209@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7210Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7211
7212@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7213Update the existing EX9 table.
7214
7215@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7216Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7217
7218@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7219Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7220
7221@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7222Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7223
7224@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7225Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7226@end table
7227
7228@ifclear GENERIC
7229@lowersections
7230@end ifclear
7231@end ifset
7232
78058a5e
SL
7233@ifset NIOSII
7234@ifclear GENERIC
7235@raisesections
7236@end ifclear
7237
7238@node Nios II
7239@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7240@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7241@kindex --relax on Nios II
7242
7243Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7244transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7245which may result in @command{ld} giving
7246@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7247The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7248trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7249outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7250trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7251be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7252larger than 256MB.
7253
7254The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7255is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7256@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7257locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7258source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7259register as a temporary.
7260
7261Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7262relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7263option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7264
7265@ifclear GENERIC
7266@lowersections
7267@end ifclear
7268@end ifset
7269
2a60a7a8
AM
7270@ifset POWERPC
7271@ifclear GENERIC
7272@raisesections
7273@end ifclear
7274
7275@node PowerPC ELF32
7276@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7277@cindex PowerPC long branches
7278@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7279Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7280displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7281@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7282@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7283the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7284section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7285section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7286@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7287both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7288considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7289
7290@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7291@table @option
7292@cindex PowerPC PLT
7293@kindex --bss-plt
7294@item --bss-plt
7295Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7296generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7297the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7298writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7299@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7300PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7301compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7302BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7303
016687f8
AM
7304@kindex --secure-plt
7305@item --secure-plt
7306@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7307@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7308when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7309layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7310style BSS PLT.
7311
2a60a7a8
AM
7312@cindex PowerPC GOT
7313@kindex --sdata-got
7314@item --sdata-got
7315The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7316sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7317@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7318section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7319@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7320@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7321@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7322@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7323PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7324pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7325GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7326really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7327
7328@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7329@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7330@item --emit-stub-syms
7331This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7332symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7333
7334@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7335@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7336@item --no-tls-optimize
7337PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7338sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7339disable the optimization.
7340@end table
7341
7342@ifclear GENERIC
7343@lowersections
7344@end ifclear
7345@end ifset
7346
7347@ifset POWERPC64
7348@ifclear GENERIC
7349@raisesections
7350@end ifclear
7351
7352@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7353@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7354
7355@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7356@table @option
7357@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7358@kindex --stub-group-size
7359@item --stub-group-size
7360Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7361by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7362@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7363sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7364a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7365the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7366conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7367prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7368A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7369branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7370@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7371@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7372detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7373positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7374
7375Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7376single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7377create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7378large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7379
7380@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7381@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7382@item --emit-stub-syms
7383This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7384symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7385
7386@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7387@kindex --dotsyms
7388@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7389@item --dotsyms
7390@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7391These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7392in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7393function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7394code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7395properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7396to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7397@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7398dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7399feature.
7400
7ae4ea7d
AM
7401@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7402@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7403@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7404@item --save-restore-funcs
7405@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7406These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7407provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7408@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7409function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7410link.
7411
2a60a7a8
AM
7412@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7413@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7414@item --no-tls-optimize
7415PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7416sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7417disable the optimization.
7418
7c9cf415
AM
7419@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7420@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7421@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7422@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7423@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7424These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7425stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7426an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7427@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7428stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7429option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7430Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7431slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7432application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7433normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7434
2a60a7a8
AM
7435@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7436@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7437@item --no-opd-optimize
7438PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7439corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7440the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7441Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7442
7443@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7444@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7445@item --non-overlapping-opd
7446Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7447@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7448the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7449entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7450
7451@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7452@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7453@item --no-toc-optimize
7454PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7455entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7456reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7457marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7458marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7459relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7460unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7461reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7462discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7463reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7464code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7465optimization.
7466
7467@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7468@kindex --no-multi-toc
7469@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7470If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7471@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7472where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7473entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7474total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7475grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7476TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7477calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7478help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
747964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7480Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7481
7482@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7483@kindex --no-toc-sort
7484@item --no-toc-sort
7485By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7486happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7487placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7488with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7489referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7490@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7491results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7492off this feature.
7493
7494@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7495@kindex --plt-align
7496@kindex --no-plt-align
7497@item --plt-align
7498@itemx --no-plt-align
7499Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7500padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7501specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7502that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7503stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7504
7505@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7506@kindex --plt-static-chain
7507@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7508@item --plt-static-chain
7509@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7510Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7511chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7512chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7513
7514@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7515@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7516@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7517@item --plt-thread-safe
7518@itemx --no-thread-safe
7519With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7520lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7521another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7522order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7523memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7524barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7525looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7526seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7527default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7528@end table
7529
7530@ifclear GENERIC
7531@lowersections
7532@end ifclear
7533@end ifset
7534
49fa1e15
AM
7535@ifset SPU
7536@ifclear GENERIC
7537@raisesections
7538@end ifclear
7539
7540@node SPU ELF
7541@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7542
7543@cindex SPU ELF options
7544@table @option
7545
7546@cindex SPU plugins
7547@kindex --plugin
7548@item --plugin
7549This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7550
7551@cindex SPU overlays
7552@kindex --no-overlays
7553@item --no-overlays
7554Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7555regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7556@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7557turns off all this special overlay handling.
7558
7559@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7560@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7561@item --emit-stub-syms
7562This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7563symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7564
7565@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7566@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7567@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7568This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7569function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7570on calls to non-overlay regions.
7571
7572@cindex SPU local store size
7573@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7574@item --local-store=lo:hi
7575@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7576the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7577range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7578
c0065db7 7579@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7580@kindex --stack-analysis
7581@item --stack-analysis
7582SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7583unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7584under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7585@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7586@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7587determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7588for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7589for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7590for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7591find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7592and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7593under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7594dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7595is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7596and calls will be given.
7597
c0065db7 7598@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7599@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7600@item --emit-stack-syms
7601This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7602in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7603These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7604functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7605functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7606such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7607The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7608@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7609@end table
7610
7611@ifclear GENERIC
7612@lowersections
7613@end ifclear
7614@end ifset
7615
36f63dca
NC
7616@ifset TICOFF
7617@ifclear GENERIC
7618@raisesections
7619@end ifclear
7620
7621@node TI COFF
7622@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7623@cindex TI COFF versions
7624@kindex --format=@var{version}
7625The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7626TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7627also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7628format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7629header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7630
7631@ifclear GENERIC
7632@lowersections
7633@end ifclear
7634@end ifset
7635
2ca22b03
NC
7636@ifset WIN32
7637@ifclear GENERIC
7638@raisesections
7639@end ifclear
7640
7641@node WIN32
7642@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7643
c0065db7 7644This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7645See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7646command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7647
7648@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7649@cindex import libraries
7650@item import libraries
69da35b5 7651The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7652libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7653regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7654archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7655support for creating such libraries provided with the
7656@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7657
c0065db7
RM
7658@item exporting DLL symbols
7659@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7660The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7661
7662@table @emph
7663@item using auto-export functionality
7664@cindex using auto-export functionality
7665By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7666which is controlled by the following command line options:
7667
0a5d968e
NC
7668@itemize
7669@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7670@item --exclude-symbols
7671@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7672@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7673@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7674@end itemize
7675
09e2aba4
DK
7676When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7677(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7678symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7679often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7680private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7681options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7682exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7683final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7684
7685If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7686command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7687if either of the following are true:
7688
7689@itemize
7690@item A DEF file is used.
7691@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7692@end itemize
dc8465bf 7693
c0065db7
RM
7694@item using a DEF file
7695@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7696Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7697an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7698exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7699name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7700command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7701
7702@example
7703gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7704@end example
7705
0a5d968e
NC
7706Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7707@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7708
dc8465bf
NC
7709Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7710
7711@example
4b5bd4e7 7712LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7713
7714EXPORTS
7715foo
7716bar
7717_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7718another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7719var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7720doo = foo == foo2
7721eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7722@end example
dc8465bf 7723
7fcab871 7724This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7725symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7726alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7727by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7728@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7729@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7730export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7731in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7732symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7733
6b31ad16
DS
7734The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7735name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7736the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7737
b45619c0
NC
7738When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7739library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7740@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7741executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7742
7743With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7744specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7745non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7746
7747If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7748or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7749filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7750
4b5bd4e7
DS
7751The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7752
7753@example
7754EXPORTS
7755 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7756 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7757 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7758@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7759
7760Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7761@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7762@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7763@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7764Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7765@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7766string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7767
7768The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7769
7770@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7771will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7772by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7773linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7774library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7775
7776@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7777The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7778the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7779@code{*_imp__foo}).
7780
7781@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7782well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7783read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7784variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7785the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7786extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7787application will behave unexpectedly.
7788
7789@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7790it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7791symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7792API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7793the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7794
4b5bd4e7
DS
7795See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7796other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7797
7798@cindex creating a DEF file
7799While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7800with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7801
7802@item Using decorations
7803@cindex Using decorations
7804Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7805itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7806declared as:
7807
7808@example
7809__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7810__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7811@end example
7812
7813All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7814any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7815this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7816the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7817
7818Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7819decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7820instead:
7821
7822@example
7823__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7824__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7825@end example
7826
c0065db7
RM
7827This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7828when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7829variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7830code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7831of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7832omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7833@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7834information.
c0065db7 7835@end table
dc8465bf 7836
2ca22b03
NC
7837@cindex automatic data imports
7838@item automatic data imports
7839The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7840by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7841compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7842issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7843code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7844c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7845initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7846decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7847platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7848command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7849The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7850suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7851trigger the feature's use.
7852
c0065db7 7853auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7854additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7855
c0065db7 7856"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7857documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7858
c0065db7
RM
7859The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7860occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7861One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7862below.
7863
7864@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7865For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7866object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7867offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7868field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7869in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7870without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7871The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7872references.
7873
c0065db7
RM
7874The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7875be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7876themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7877runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7878compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7879support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7880run without error on an older system.
7881
c0065db7
RM
7882@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7883enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7884
7885@cindex direct linking to a dll
7886@item direct linking to a dll
7887The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7888including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7889libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7890traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7891libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7892function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7893though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7894storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7895tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7896large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7897
c0065db7 7898Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7899@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7900of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7901perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7902select the dll instead of an import library.
7903
2ca22b03 7904
69da35b5
NC
7905For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7906to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7907
7908@example
45e948fe
NC
7909libxxx.dll.a
7910xxx.dll.a
7911libxxx.a
7912xxx.lib
69da35b5 7913cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7914libxxx.dll
7915xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7916@end example
7917
69da35b5
NC
7918before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7919
c0065db7
RM
7920(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7921where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7922@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7923file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7924@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7925
c0065db7
RM
7926Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7927@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7928was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7929various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7930could coexist on the same machine.
7931
2ca22b03
NC
7932The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7933applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7934libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7935
7936@example
7937bin/
7938 cygxxx.dll
7939lib/
7940 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7941 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7942@end example
7943
c0065db7
RM
7944Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7945done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7946
79471. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7948@example
7949gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7950@end example
2ca22b03 7951
69da35b5
NC
7952However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7953(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7954@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7955not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7956
2ca22b03
NC
79572. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7958directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7959should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7960making the app/dll.
7961
7962@example
7963ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7964@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7965
7966Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7967
7968@example
7969gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7970@end example
69da35b5
NC
7971
7972This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7973perfectly legal
7974
7975@example
7976bin/
7977 cygxxx-5.dll
7978lib/
c0065db7 7979 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7980@end example
7981
dc8465bf 7982Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7983even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7984@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7985
7986Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7987wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7988
79891. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7990work with auto-imported data.
7991
dc8465bf
NC
79922. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7993import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7994symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7995for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7996possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7997
45e948fe
NC
79983. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7999critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8000in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8001stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8002
69da35b5 8003So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8004true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8005a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8006binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8007massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8008requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8009will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8010
c0065db7 8011@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8012@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8013@item adding additional names
8014Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8015A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8016exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8017when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8018import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8019
c0065db7 8020@example
dc8465bf
NC
8021LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8022
8023EXPORTS
c0065db7 8024foo
dc8465bf 8025_foo = foo
c0065db7 8026@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8027
8028The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8029
8030Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8031source code using the "weak" attribute:
8032
c0065db7
RM
8033@example
8034void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8035void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8036@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8037
8038See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8039symbols.
8040
8041@item renaming symbols
8042Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8043kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8044@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8045DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8046created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8047
c0065db7 8048@example
dc8465bf
NC
8049LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8050
8051EXPORTS
8052_foo = foo
c0065db7 8053@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8054
8055The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8056@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8057@end table
dc8465bf 8058
0a5d968e 8059Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8060unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8061If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8062@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8063that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8064@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8065renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8066to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8067the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8068In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8069which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8070
8071@cindex weak externals
8072@item weak externals
8073The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8074weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8075defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8076are three variants of weak externals:
8077@itemize
8078@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8079called lazy externals.
8080@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8081This form is not presently implemented.
8082@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8083implemented.
8084@end itemize
8085As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8086are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8087uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8088
8089@cindex aligned common symbols
8090@item aligned common symbols
8091As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8092desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8093the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8094carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8095by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8096tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8097but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8098warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8099
2ca22b03
NC
8100@end table
8101
8102@ifclear GENERIC
8103@lowersections
8104@end ifclear
8105@end ifset
8106
e0001a05
NC
8107@ifset XTENSA
8108@ifclear GENERIC
8109@raisesections
8110@end ifclear
8111
8112@node Xtensa
8113@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8114
8115@cindex Xtensa processors
8116The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8117@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8118specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8119keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8120example, with the command:
8121
8122@smallexample
8123SECTIONS
8124@{
8125 .text : @{
8126 *(.literal .text)
8127 @}
8128@}
8129@end smallexample
8130
8131@noindent
8132@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8133and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8134literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8135interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8136group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8137files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8138and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8139
43cd72b9 8140@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8141@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8142Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8143provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8144is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8145literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8146will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8147location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8148the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8149unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8150@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8151range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8152
8153For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8154to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8155instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8156instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8157instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8158@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8159hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8160By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8161switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8162density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8163instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8164performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8165linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8166a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8167
8168The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8169control the linker:
8170
8171@cindex Xtensa options
8172@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8173@item --size-opt
8174When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8175more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8176no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8177alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8178preserve the correctness of the code.
8179@end table
e0001a05
NC
8180
8181@ifclear GENERIC
8182@lowersections
8183@end ifclear
8184@end ifset
8185
252b5132
RH
8186@ifclear SingleFormat
8187@node BFD
8188@chapter BFD
8189
8190@cindex back end
8191@cindex object file management
8192@cindex object formats available
8193@kindex objdump -i
8194The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8195These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8196object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8197format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8198it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8199associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8200object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8201(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8202list all the formats available for your configuration.
8203
8204@cindex BFD requirements
8205@cindex requirements for BFD
8206As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8207several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8208BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8209formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8210been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8211BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8212may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8213
8214One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8215mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8216useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8217conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8218
8219@menu
8220* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8221@end menu
8222
8223@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8224@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8225@cindex opening object files
8226@include bfdsumm.texi
8227@end ifclear
8228
8229@node Reporting Bugs
8230@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8231@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8232@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8233
ff5dcc92 8234Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8235
8236Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8237it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8238to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8239work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8240@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8241
8242In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8243information that enables us to fix the bug.
8244
8245@menu
8246* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8247* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8248@end menu
8249
8250@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8251@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8252@cindex bug criteria
8253
8254If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8255
8256@itemize @bullet
8257@cindex fatal signal
8258@cindex linker crash
8259@cindex crash of linker
8260@item
8261If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8262@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8263
8264@cindex error on valid input
8265@item
ff5dcc92 8266If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8267
8268@cindex invalid input
8269@item
ff5dcc92 8270If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8271may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8272object files are correct.
8273
8274@item
8275If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8276improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8277@end itemize
8278
8279@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8280@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8281@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8282@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8283
8284A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8285products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8286recommend you contact that organization first.
8287
8288You can find contact information for many support companies and
8289individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8290distribution.
8291
ad22bfe8 8292@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8293Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8294@value{BUGURL}.
8295@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8296
8297The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8298@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8299fact or leave it out, state it!
8300
8301Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8302problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8303assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8304matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8305the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8306location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8307were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8308into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8309specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8310and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8311
8312Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8313the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8314on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8315
8316Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8317bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8318respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8319You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8320
8321To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8322
8323@itemize @bullet
8324@item
ff5dcc92 8325The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8326the @samp{--version} argument.
8327
8328Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8329the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8330
8331@item
ff5dcc92 8332Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8333patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8334
8335@item
8336The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8337version number.
8338
8339@item
ff5dcc92 8340What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8341``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8342
8343@item
8344The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8345observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8346list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8347sufficient.
8348
8349If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8350and then we might not encounter the bug.
8351
8352@item
8353A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8354bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8355provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8356bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8357state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8358requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8359we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8360attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8361
8362If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8363@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8364object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8365@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8366how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8367
8368@item
8369A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8370incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8371
ff5dcc92 8372Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8373will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8374not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8375a chance to make a mistake.
8376
8377Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8378say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8379copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8380C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8381and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8382fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8383you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8384any conclusion from our observations.
8385
8386@item
ff5dcc92 8387If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8388diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8389@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8390If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8391context, not by line number.
8392
8393The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8394sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8395@end itemize
8396
8397Here are some things that are not necessary:
8398
8399@itemize @bullet
8400@item
8401A description of the envelope of the bug.
8402
8403Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8404which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8405changes will not affect it.
8406
8407This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8408will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8409with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8410We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8411
8412Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8413of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8414output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8415less time, and so on.
8416
8417However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8418report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8419
8420@item
8421A patch for the bug.
8422
8423A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8424the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8425a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8426to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8427
ff5dcc92 8428Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8429construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8430through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8431able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8432fixed.
8433
8434And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8435patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8436help us to understand.
8437
8438@item
8439A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8440
8441Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8442things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8443@end itemize
8444
8445@node MRI
8446@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8447@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8448To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8449linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8450alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8451described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8452simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8453@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8454linker commands; these commands are described here.
8455
8456In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8457file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8458features to make use of them.
8459
8460You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8461@samp{-c} command-line option.
8462
8463Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8464command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8465blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8466MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8467issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8468
8469Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8470
8471You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8472lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8473The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8474
8475@table @code
8476@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8477@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8478@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8479Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8480the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8481@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8482your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8483script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8484commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8485input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8486@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8487
8488@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8489@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8490Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8491in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8492
8493@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8494
8495@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8496@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8497Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8498@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8499
8500@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8501@item BASE @var{expression}
8502Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8503absolute addresses) in the output file.
8504
8505@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8506@item CHIP @var{expression}
8507@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8508This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8509
8510@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8511@item END
8512This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8513
8514@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8515@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8516Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8517language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8518
8519@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8520@item
252b5132
RH
8521S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8522
8523@item
8524IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8525
8526@item
8527COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8528@samp{COFF}
8529@end enumerate
8530
8531@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8532@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8533Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8534@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8535
8536The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8537same line, with no change in its effect.
8538
8539@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8540@item LOAD @var{filename}
8541@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8542Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8543same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8544command line.
8545
8546@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8547@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8548@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8549MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8550option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8551
8552@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8553@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8554@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8555Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8556order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8557script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8558sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8559file, in the order specified.
8560
8561@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8562@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8563@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8564@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8565Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8566@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8567
8568@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8569@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8570@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8571@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8572You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8573specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8574If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8575@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8576@end table
8577
793c5807
NC
8578@node GNU Free Documentation License
8579@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8580@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8581
370b66a1
CD
8582@node LD Index
8583@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8584
8585@printindex cp
8586
8587@tex
7ca01ed9 8588% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8589% meantime:
8590\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8591\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8592\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8593\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8594\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8595\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8596\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8597\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8598\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8599% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8600@end tex
8601
252b5132 8602@bye
This page took 1.32127 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.